Skip to main content

Full text of "Carlos Castaneda Collection"

See other formats


A Magical Journey 
with Carlos 
Castaneda 



A Magical Journey 
with Carlos 
Castaneda 


Margaret Runyan Castaneda 


iUniverse.com, Inc. 

San lose New York Lincoln Shanghai 



A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 

All Rights Reserved © 2001 by Margaret Runyan Castaneda 

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by 
any means, graphic, electronic, or mcchanical.including photocopying, 
recording, taping, or by any information storage retrieval system, without 
the permission in writing from the publisher. 

Published by iUniversc.com. Inc. 

For information address: 
iUnivcrsc.com, Inc. 

5220 S 16th. Ste. 200 
Lincoln, NE 68512 
www, i universe.com 


The information and material contained in this book arc provided "as is,” 
without warranty of any kind, express or implied, including without 
limitation any warranty concerning the accuracy, adequacy, or completeness 
of such information or material or the results to be obtained from using 
such information or material. Neither iUnivcrsc.com. Inc., nor the author 
shall be responsible for any claims attributable to errors, omissions, or other 
inaccuracies in the information or material contained in this book, and in 
no event shall iUniversc.com, Inc. or the author be liable for direct, indirect, 
special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of the use of such 
information or material. 

ISBN: 0-595-15318-6 
Printed in the United States of America 



Don’t write in stone or write in wood, 
that I was honest or that I was good. 
But write in smoke on a passing breeze — 
Seven words and the words arc these: 
Filling more than a volume could, 

He liwd, he laughed and he understood. 


— Don Blanding, My Epithet 



Introduction 

Carlos looked at me with those big brown eyes that looked like ebony- 
almonds. He was in an impish mood. He whispered, "Oh, Missa 
Runyan, I will start a revolution that will last beyond our lifetime — and 
you arc a part of it!" 

He laughed. It sounded almost inhuman, like the cawing of a crow. 
“Carlos, you are crazy!" 1 said. Then he picked me up and slung me over 
his shoulder. I hit him with my purse. We fell down laughing. I was 
hooked by this diminutive man who would become my husband. 

One of Carlos’s good friends during his early days in Los Angeles was 
I.ydettc Maduro, a chubby, dark-eyed Catsta Rican who lived in I. os 
Angeles with her mother, He called her Nanecca and saw her frequently 
prior to the end of 1 955. It was I.vdette who brought Carlos to my apart- 
ment in December 1955. Mrs. Angela Maduro, her mother, had made two 
cocktail dresses for the Christmas holiday season for me. Carlos accom- 
panied I ydette on the errand, l ie sat silently in the corner while I tried the 
dresses on to see that they fit just right. The dresses were beautiful. One 
was blue peau dc-soie with a dropped waist line and Chantilly lace fitted 
top with rhinestone straps. The skirt was puffed at the bottom like pan- 
taloons and quite short. T he other dress was a mandarin silk brocade 
with Chinese motifs on it. They fit perfectly. As Carlos and l.vdcttc were 
leaving, she stepped outside the door and with Carlos beside her she said, 
“Oh Margarita, this is my friend, Carlos from South America.” He smiled 
at me — said nothing and they turned and walked away. 

I closed the door, stood there overwhelmed by the look he had given 
me. My head pounded while my mind was thinking over the encounter. 
I couldn't get him out of my mind; I felt the look he gave me was a sure 
sign he would call soon. However, he didn’t. 

vii 



viii / A Magical fourncy with Cation Castaneda 


Shortly after that, I went to the Maduros to pick up the dresses. 
They were ready fora final fitting. Before leaving my apartment, I had 
an intuitive impulse or hunch that prompted me to do something 
unusual. I wrote my name, address and telephone number in a book 
by Neville Goddard, The Search. 1 planned to give it to Carlos if the 
occasion arose. 

My arrival at I.ydette's house unexpected caught her off guard. Carlos 
was there (which proved my hunch was right). The cocktail dress was 
lying on the bed. Carlos and Lydette were talking and didn't notice I was 
there ‘till I cleared my throat and said, “Hello, Lydette.” She turned 
towards me startled, while Carlos just smiled. She said, “Carlos, mother 
needs your help in the kitchen." 

As he left the room, Lydette smiled and said sweetly, “Next time, call 
before you come.” 

I knew she was hopelessly in love with the man she fold me was only a 
friend of the family. She needn't worry though. I would never fall in love 
again. It was the only thing I was certain about. Still I felt nervous. I 
wanted to run. 

Of course 1 couldn’t run. I had come to try the dresses on and take 
them with me. I had parties to attend. Then she said they were not quite 
ready. “I'll come back," I said, “when would be a good time?" “Mother 
will call you," Lydette said. Then with a change of mood she became 
friendly and talked about our limes in the past, things we did with 
Carlos and her brother that 1 dated who had been killed in a revolution 
in Costa Rica. I had spent many happy times with their family. 

As Lydette showed me to the door, she said, “You really like Carlos, 
don’t you?” 

“Well, he seems nice," I said. 

“I warn you, beware of him, he has power. . . " 

“That little man? Lydette, he only comes to my shoulder.” 

“Not physical power," she whispered. "He can charm your soul, he is 
a curnndero.” 




ix / Introduction 


“A what?" 

“Shaman, a magician." 

I looked at Lydette in disbelief. Carlos looked more like an Indian 
with a youthful face, than a wizard. "I’m sure he's a magician," I said to 
humor her, because I didn't believe a word she said. 

“I am right,” she said. “I know what I believe is true and you will find 
out too, if you're not careful." 

Believing she was trying to scare me away from the man she con 
sidered her property, I said, “Don’t worry, Lydette, I'm not very 
attracted to Carlos." 

I wanted it to be true, but something was happening to me, I don’t 
know what — but I sensed this was not my last meeting with Carlos. 

“I think you are lying, Miss Runyan," Lydette's eyes said, then she 
walked me to the door in silence. 

We stood there a moment, Lydette on the threshold, and I on the step. 
Suddenly, Carlos appealed beside Lydette smiling broadly — his teeth looked 
like pearls. "Goodbye, Missa Runyan," he said, stepping forward, extending 
his hand. It was then I slipped him the book from my purse, Neville’s, 7 "he 
Search. Inside 1 had written my telephone number and address. He tucked it 
under his arm out of Lydette's view and returned to the house. Lydette 
waved goodbye. I walked along the sidewalk to the bus stop, and sat down 
beside an old lady with a shopping cart full of bottles. She asked for a quar- 
ter. My hand was shaking as I looked in my purse. Something had happened 
to me at Lydette’s house. What, I did not know — but it was exciting. 

As the bus rumbled up Vine Street and onto Wilshire Boulevard, I 
looked out at the city lights and saw Carlos's face reflected in each of them. 

He had my number. I will not try to call him, I told myself. 

But it was to no avail. Deep down I knew we would meet again. So I 
visualized his face and whispered a silent message: call me. Then the 
long wait began... 

Thus began my magical journey with Carlos Castaneda. 




x / A Magical Journey wilh Catlox Castaneda 



Mother and I- 

The dress iB the one I wore on my first date with Carlos. 1956 




Contents 

Introduction vii 

Part One Beginnings I 

Part Two Spun by Allegory 101 

Epilogue 213 

About the Author 1 1 7 


xi 



Part One 


Beginnings 




1 


In sleep that night, the dream returns. He's alone on the desert again, 
barefoot and frightened and looking for the strange force they call the 
ally, which is sort of a spirit guide or psychic being. It’s something 
Carlos must somehow find and defeat as a final ritual of passage. So he 
is out here in the middle of this forsaken wilderness, just wandering 
around among the shrub and the waterbarrel cacti, marooned, search- 
ing, one man alone in the wasteland. And the only thing he can think 
about is the twelve years he’s spent getting here. Twelve years as a sor- 
cerer's apprentice, twelve years learning the ritual and technique, one- 
fourth of his life preparing for this moment ... this existential moment! 
Twelve years! 

And absolutely nothing is happening. Nothing. Not even the lizards 
are out yet. A vacant silence has settled over the place. There is nothing 
but the shrub and the cacti and the shadows rolling back away from the 
dawn. Its as if Carlos has been out there forever, when suddenly, he sees 
something — a man, a huge, towering hulk of a man with thick arms ris- 
ing out of the shadows. He's dressed in a dark jacket and a pair of dou- 
ble-knits with a red bandanna tied at the throat, which seems so 
ludicrous in this place, and he's got these thin spectral cheekbones and 
a great angular nose. There arc hollows where his eyes should be. Carlos 
steps backwards in awe and for a moment the whole scene just hovers 
above itself. 


3 




4 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


Then the ally starts walking. He is walking towards Carlos, taking 
long slow steps straight at him, digging the heels of his patent leather 
boots into the sand. Suddenly, there are hawks in the sky. This is it, no 
doubt about it — the denouement, the culminating battle of a man of 
knowledge! It has taken twelve years to reach this point. 

But it never goes any further, for some strange reason everything 
always stops right here, just as the ally is making his approach. Everything 
freezes, and overhead, out among the hawks, a single crow is wheeling 
across the Mexican sky. It is an omen, a metaphor, the last link with 
Carlos' personal life — which is to say his real life and not the character in 
his books — and in a single electric instant Carlos understands that this is 
his final weakness, the last link to be broken before he becomes a man of 
knowledge. And as he stands there, the details of his apprenticeship wash 
across his memory in a backward moving tide — 

An nltl Indian swimming in air ami climbing waterfalls, alkaloid sleeps 
in dingy cabins, consciousness dreaming, chewing peyote, strawberry-faced 
allies, the hallucinations, the trance running, the ecstatic aluininunt/oil 
visions, the early lectures on “seeing," his fabled meeting of Don Juan. 

And suddenly he’s back at the beginning again. All the teachings 
are fresh again and the rule is new: Break all bonds! There is no coinci- 
dence, there are no dreams! There are only the fleeting incomprehensi- 
ble images crashing through the skull. Suddenly, Carlos is in the 
Slipstream and it is a million colors. 

“Chocho,” he screams at the crow, but the bird is too high. Carlos 
Castaneda leaps up from his bed. "Chocho!" 

Nanny, a UCIA student who is with him here in Westwood, walks over 
to the mattress and sits down and puts her arms around him. “No,” she 
says softly. “He’s not here. C.J. is back with his mother. It’s only a dream." 
“But 1 was there," whispers Carlos Castaneda. “1 was right there.” 
Nanny strokes his hair. “Not yet,” she says. “Not yet.” 




5 / Beginnings 


II isn't exactly easy, you know. It’s no cinch putting whole inexplicable 
worldviews down on paper so that every burgher from Schenectady to 
Long Beach can understand. Carlos Castaneda is having a great deal of 
difficulty doing it, waking up nights in cold sweats and then trying to 
reconstruct enough to make sense of it all. That's not to say his books are 
a product of his nightmares. On the contrary, he has spent years research- 
ing sorcery and Indian culture in the libraries around UCLA, traveled the 
desiccated Mexican plains, and invested a quarter of his life collecting 
information on medical plants and the rest from informants. One-quar- 
ter of his life probing their strange Paleolithic philosophies. He hits paid 
his dues to mysticism and the great god Anthropology. Moreover, he has 
spent years hunched over that damned typewriter telling his whole story 
in meticulous detail. Now, here in the spring of 1974, with three books 
out and a fourth over there on the desk, he has become more than just a 
cult hero of the West, more than just a minor legend, he is more than that, 
he has become. . .Castaneda — a Man of Power. 

And the way he did it was to transform rather basic Eastern philo- 
sophical ideas into pure shamanic aperyu* — that sort of danger there in 
the drift. The message was always the same there is a reality apart from 
ego-bound real world. He would sit there at his typewriter, roll his 
brown eyes shut in deep metaphysical concentration, and channel every- 
thing through the Magnificent Mystifier way back there in the cerebral 
peduncle or someplace. Finally, out would come something like. 
“Knowledge is a moth” or “Death stands always to the left.” Something 
soaring and cryptic. It’s like hitting a moving target trying to understand 
what Carlos Castaneda is talking about — and God knows, everybody is 
trying to understand. 

The only thing you have to go on arc his books, his magnificent 
story, all about how he was once an undergraduate at UCLA and ran 
across an old Indian whom he called Don |uan who revealed a unique 
personal worldview perceived by a network of Central and South 
American sorcerers that everybody thought was long extinct. But here 




6 / A Magical tourney with Carlos Castaneda 


they were, and this student was living among them and writing about 
them. For twelve years, from I960 through 1972, Carlos says he served 
as an apprentice medicine man to Don luan and he watched the gradual 
revelation of his Indian’s role as botanist, curer, sorcerer, warrior, brvjo, 
and master of eclectic ritual. Don Juan used three drugs — peyote, 
mushrooms and Jimson weed — during the early stages of Carlos' 
apprenticeship. The drugs were aimed at breaking down cultural condi 
tioning and, ultimately, one's safe perception of the world. 

Carlos wrote about his experiences as an apprentice in a series of 
four books, published between 1968 and 1974. It was a flat-out Hesse 
ideal: student of life meets spiritual master, only Carlos was saying that 
it actually happened. Here was a guy from Los Angeles saying he had 
lived this strange metaphysical existence on the Mexican plain and had 
come back to tell about it, In the four books, which from the outset 
were more philosophy than anthropology, he had put down in black 
and white the conversation, the ritual, the hallucinations, the aperyus, 
the final sorcerer's explanation — the whole reticular system. It was all 
there, only it remained rather incomprehensible to the end. Even 
Carlos admitted that his work gave only a superficial view of how a 
grizzled old Yaqui brujo views the world. The key, Carlos wrote, was to 
understand that the world of common-sense reality is a product of 
social consensus, an idea basic to Carlos’ favorite area of academic 
study at UCLA — phenomenology. 

In his first book, The Teachings of Pan luan: A Yaqui Way of 
Knowledge, Carlos wrote about milotes — peyote ceremonies — in 
which the participants “see" rather than just look. That is, they use a 
total bodily awareness to flesh out the world as it is, not just as it 
appears as a result of descriptions pounded in from birth. The brujos 
can hall the fleeting stream of interpretation that makes up our rather 
feeble perception of things. What you’re left with after stopping the 
stream is pure wondering perception — where gut-sense prevails and 
the body overtakes reason. 




7 t Beginnings 


It was there, in Die Teachings, that Carlos described how he first met 
his Indian teacher, Don Juan, in an Arizona bus depot. He was collect- 
ing material for a college paper on psychotropic drug use among the 
locals and, told of Don Juan’s purported knowledge in the field, he 
sought the old man out. It took nearly a year before Don Juan 
explained that he possessed a certain strange knowledge and agreed to 
let Carlos in on it. This was somethingof a revolutionary thing because 
there is a strict convention among krujos that the secrets are to be 
taught only to their own kin. But Don Juan made an exception and 
Carlos, who pictured himself as the most unlikely of apprentices, 
began his apprenticeship first in Arizona and later moved to Sonora, 
Mexico. At first, the Indian made him roll around on the porch under 
the ramada until he found his spot, which is to say the exact location 
where he felt absolutely right. It took Carlos six hours of rolling around 
there on the porch before he began perceiving delicate changes of hue 
and a narrowing of the vision, and finally he settled on a spot Don Juan 
called the sitio, the place that gave a sense of superior strength. The 
apprenticeship was off and running. 

A few months later, Carlos and Don Juan traveled to the house of 
another Indian and it was there that Carlos had his first taste of peyote 
and the soaring hallucinations it brings. There was jargon to learn and 
steps to take before becoming a man of knowledge in the ancient tradi- 
tion; there was that peculiar kind of salori called “seeing" in which the 
world takes on a new existential meaning. In the brujo's system, allies 
stand at the periphery ready to help an apprentice, advise him, give him 
strength and so forth. And there was another kind of power called 
Mescalito, a protector and teacher who produced states of con 
sciousness beyond ordinary reality. 

All this was pretty far out, of course, but Carlos succeeded in devel- 
oping these primitive religious ideas in a neat and interesting way. He 
recounted long Socratic sessions with his Indian teacher, conversations 
that gave resonance and depth to all the ritual and shamanic technique 




S / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


that had seemed almost silly from a distance. He returned from the crest 
of his hallucinations with the most detailed notes on the primitive 
netherworld since Fr. Bernardino de Sahagun first stumbled on the pey 
ote feasts of the northern desert hunters of Mexico. 

In a border town one day. Don |uan explained that the man of 
knowledge faces four enemies. Like so many of Don luan's perorations, 
it was intricately constructed, beautifully conceived and devoid of real- 
world logic. 

The first enemy of the man of knowledge is fear, mostly of the 
unknown. As he begins to learn, the apprentice faces a second enemy, 
clarity of mind, which Don luan says can dispel fear but also blinds the 
initiate to the rather terrible psychic possibilities of letting go of one’s 
personal sense of reality too soon. It’s really a matter of balance, of mov- 
ing slowly in the exchange of realities, the burgher’s for the sorcerer’s. 
It’s there, in the exchange, that the sense of personal power comes, a 
secret kind of ancient power that can make an apprentice cruel and 
capricious, such is the case for a lot of those old farts out there in the 
desert. But for somebody who can handle it and use it to understand 
the non logical cosmos, for that person there is only one thing that 
stands in the way, the enemy of old age. 

And so here was this old man sitting in some border town with 
Carlos, describing how the fourth enemy was something that could 
never be defeated entirely, only kept at a distance for a while, and 
Carlos wrote it all down verbatim in a rather enigmatic exchange in 
his first book. 

The sequel. A Separate Reality: Further Comvrsations with Dim Juan, 
included more of Don luan, his adventures and his teachings, and 
introduced Don Genaro, a Mazatec superman with a predilection for 
pirouetting across the edge of waterfalls and floating a few inches off 
the floor. If Don luan’s method was the Socratic dialogue, Don Genaro’s 
was creative gymnastics. The book covers the second phase of Carlos's 
apprenticeship from April 1968 to October 1970. By the book's end. 



9 / Beginnings 


Don Genaro tries to break Carlos's clawhold on Western logic and rea- 
son by violating the rules of Aristotelian time and space. He travels ten 
miles in an instant. He actually moves from open plain to a distant 
scree-covered mountain ledge ten miles away in a single transcendent 
moment. . . here. . . there. Impossible! 

It is left to the reader to conclude that the Indians are manipulating 
Carlos's conversations. There are no signposts. It’s like when Carlos flew 
in the second book. At the direction of Don |uan and with the help of a 
little Jimson weed, Carlos felt himself one afternoon leave the ground 
and soar across the desert. When he returned, he asked Don Juan if, in 
fact, he actually had flown or merely had hallucinated the trip. The 
question was absurd to Don Juan’s mind, and therein lay the crux of the 
matter of sorcery. It was, above all, a matter of mind. Carlos flew all 
right, a flight different from, but no less real, in the brujo’s world than 
that of a crow. It was the flight of a man who had used Jimson weed and 
all those arbitrary distinctions of the Western world were as irrelevant 
to the shaman, as the difference between dreaming and waking. 

In the early days of the apprenticeship, Carlos used drugs and so he 
could explain everything away as a function of the chemicals, but 
toward the end, through the third and fourth books of the Don Juan 
tetralogy, he began experiencing extraordinary phenomena — lights, 
colors, allies, forces, inexplicable sounds — with a clear and chemically 
unmuddlcd head. Suddenly, it was obvious that the Indian, that gritty 
product of the open plains, was not only the progenitor of a complex 
primitive god system, but also of a totally unique view of things, a per 
spective and worldview as revolutionary in its own way as Einstein's 
must have seemed to the German intelligentsia in 1921. No! Even 
more than that — as Nietzsche's must have seemed, or Darwin’s. Sud- 
denly all those fineboned notions about Europeans being the only 
ones who could ever develop a system of rational thought would 
waver and fall. 




10 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


In loumey to Ixtlan, the third book, Carlos returns to his field notes 
of the first two years of his apprenticeship. Most of the book, all except 
the last three chapters, is material he previously had excluded because it 
didn't deal directly with hallucinations. In the early days, the drugs were 
the most fascinating aspect of becoming a primitive man of knowledge 
and so the other stuff, the tranquil conversations learning the shaman's 
vocabulary and a whole series of esoteric lessons — all that was generally 
ignored. It was only later, after he understood the limits of drug use, 
that Carlos returned to the early conversations. There are no psy- 
chotropics in loumey to Ixtlun, only lessons of ihe sorcerer's conception 
of death and the various techniques for enlightenment. It came the 
closest of explaining that the ordinary experience of the world is only "a 
description." 

The final three chapters are new material, not reconstructed field 
notes from the early years, and they carry the apprenticeship through 
May 1971. Carlos wrote as much about Don Genaro as Don luan, espe 
dally about the old Mazatec’s brilliant pantomimes and the baffling 
physiopsychic feats — such as making Carlos's car seem to disappear and 
then reappear out on the desert. Confronting a coyote a little while later, 
Carlos is able to suspend the limits of his cultural conditioning enough 
to actually communicate with it. This is weighty stuff, the glistening edge 
of schizophrenia. Don Genaro warns him of the dangers by explaining 
his journey to Ixtlan, a broad and frightening metaphor of what can 
happen to the psyche not ready for the deepest revelations of sorcery. 

As a young man, Don Genaro chose to perform the rite of passage — 
which is to say, by wrestling the ally. As he tells it, he met the ally on the 
plain but was not strong enough and was hurled into a netherworld 
where people appear only as phantoms. Genaro moves constantly, 
heading always for his home in Ixtlan, a journey he says he can never 
complete. The point of this rather mystical story was that Carlos, too, 
would one day find himself face-to-face with the ally and would have to 
wrestle it. If he was prepared, if his personal life was in order and his 




1 1 I Beginnings 


power was strong enough, he would find himself alive in the real — but 
separate — sorcerer’s world. 

And so Carlos sits at the typewriter, trying to make some sense of it. 
He looks down and makes slits of his eyes, red-rimmed from lack of 
sleep, and the only thing he can think of is that damned nightmare. 
He hasn’t had a decent night's sleep in weeks. It always just sort of 
creeps in there at night, a horrible frightening vision of himself walk- 
ing barefoot on the Mexican desert at dawn, searching for the ally 
which he must wrestle to the sand. If he wins, he earns the title of 
brujo, but if he loses... 

But it never goes that far. Carlos and the ally finally meet on the 
plain. The adrenaline starts pumping. Cirlos just stands there, staring 
straight into those hollow eyes, primed and ready to fight it out. Then 
suddenly, there is the crow again and for some reason the whole thing 
just sort of dissolves. It just washes away and Carlos is awake again, sit 
ting up in bed at home in Westwood with the sweat rolling down his 
jawline, wondering if this damned nightmare w ill ever go away. 

But then, that’s the psychic baggage one has to bear if one is Carlos 
Castaneda. He is, after all, one of our few European rationalists who 
have stepped deeply into the practice of Indian sorcery. It has never 
seemed more primitive or more attuned, probably because Carlos has 
been aware of it for so long. As an undergraduate at UCLA, he knew the 
practices of the brujos in Mexico don’t just spring up full-blown in 
I960. They really are primitive. They have roots 2,000 and 3,000 years 
old that reach back into the peyote and mushroom cults of the Aztecs 
and the Toltecs — to the shamans of Siberia and the atavistic masters of 
South America. Carlos didn’t just stumble into all this. He holds fast to 
the story that he is from Brazil; actually was born in Peru, and it was 
there — not in Arizona, Sonora or Oaxaca — there on the square at 
Cajamarca that Carlos Arana first learned about the brujos; and it was 
here, that Carlos Castaneda began his journey. 




2 


In the Peruvian winter, from June to November, the rarefied fogs hang 
like gauze over the Andean cordilleras. There’s a brown moonscape of 
desert on the western coast of the Andes and even there, its’ bone 
chilling. On the street corners of Trujillo and Cajamarca and Lima, 
the Quechua Indians stand in straw shoes, wrapped in woolen sarapes 
against the midnight breeze of the Humboldt current. To the west, 
there are the tropics, dense jungles and the headwaters of Mother 
River — the Amazon. 

Salas, a tiny Pacific coastal village, is reputed to be the capital of the 
northern citru micros, the folk healers. Not far from Salas are blue fresh- 
water pools of undetermined depth, sacred lagoons where the magic- 
plants of the northern highlands grow. Twelve thousand feet straight 
up in the Peruvian stratosphere, near the southern border of Ecuador, 
lie the most revered of South American lagoons — Las Huaringas. 
Along the reed banks the nut brown curandems and brujos of the south 
lands sing canoes into existence and sail across the water and the 
carboniferous streams into zero time. They always carry leather 
pouches or jelly jars to fill with vilca snuffs and narcotic legumes, 
enough to last a season back on the medicine circuit in the city. It's like 
a psychedelic supermarket there in the foothills — coca leaves, holy 
Datura plants, tree fungi of the specie Psylocibe and Ayahuasca, the 
“vine of the dead spirits." And there, standing like emerald organ pipes 


12 



13 I Beginnings 


in the scree, is San Pedro — Mother Cactus! — the most mind-altering 
substance in the whole fantastic expanse of Las Huaringas. 

For hundreds of years, the curanderos have been setting their spirits 
free 1 2,000 feet straight up on top of the world. First they sliced San 
Pedro into long loaves and then boiled them for hours in black pots. 
Under the late night sky they drank the magic infusion. Under the 
tutelage of Mother Cactus, the curauderos say, there are no more refer- 
ence points, no more middle ground. No boundaries. No coincidence. 
Only that ineluctable half-consciousness in the backbrain they know 
as the Slipstream. 

In the Chicama River Valley, about fifty miles west of Carlos 
Castaneda's birthplace, the Temple of the Brujo stands rotting in the 
shade of mimosas and Eucalyptus trees. Two pyramids, Coa and 
Prieta, rise from the plateau like brown weather-beaten guards against 
the coastal sky. The outer wall is broken, exposing the outline of old 
paintings. Terra cotta friezes stretch along the roof where geometric 
lizards and cats do their last dance in endless time. Hundreds of years 
before the temple was built, this spot was considered sacred. Young 
men from Cajamarca gathered here and, in the late day Peruvian sun, 
listened to a bony-faced legendary shaman talk about allies and spir- 
its. He was an ancient with no name, who explained how the moun- 
tains were really dreaming brufos and how animals and plants were 
inextricably tied up in the same system. Plants, like men, grew and 
were subject to death. Each ate and needed to breed and each 
responded in its way to the environment. He explained that there was 
a certain affinity between the world of men and the world of plants, 
and while the two seemed radically different, they were the same 
world nevertheless. Some plants, however, were special. They were 
magic, housing spirits and forces that gave men a unique perception 
of things. In essence, these plants were willing to share their view of a 
separate reality with man. And in order to truly understand this rela- 
tionship, to really perceive the nature of all parts of the world, one had 




M / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


to empty one’s brain of all cultural impediments that accumulates 
throughout the real-world process of tribal socialization and so 
forth and then stand anew at the gates of the Slipstream and see. 

The Legendary Shaman of the Chicama River Valley became 
well-known throughout much of South America because he out- 
lined a system of thought that eventually affected all the Americas, 
to some extent. 

Of course, it wasn’t the first time a man-god had raised a raggedy 
head to the stars and taken a good look inside. There have always been 
men shamanizing in the hunter’s small world. The Magdalenian artists 
painted their shamans in full bison gear on the walls of Paleolithic caves 
in Trois Frercs, Then there were the Egyptian mushroom zealots and 
the African shamans of the half-baked Ozymandian sheikdoms of the 
Sudan. There was the magician Moses and the flesh-and-bone Greek 
rainmaker Zeus. They were everywhere. The whole thing swept like an 
infected tide across western Eurasia, Siberia, over the Baltic Strait and 
across the Pacific — and wherever the magic plants grew, there were the 
spirits. On the North American plains, there was peyote. In Oaxaca, 
mushrooms. In India, the mysterious Soma. In Peru, Ayahuasca, Datura 
and Mother Cactus. 

And like his counterparts — time frames and lifestyles apart — the 
Legendary Shaman explained to his apprentices that the plants were not 
an end in themselves, but a means of reaching an end. They called it see- 
ing even then, which made absolutely no sense to the Incas, who were 
an upwardly mobile lot, with little tolerance for the narcotic tradition of 
the curanderos and less for their individualism. Things didn't change 
once the Christians arrived 300 years later. It was as if Pizarro had just 
captured Atahuallpa in downtown Cajamarca, when suddenly, you had 
missionaries everywhere — building straw brick churches, baptizing the 
rabble and generally letting the philanthropic juices flow. There were 
converts to be sure, but there were also those would not let go of the 
past, curanderos who were the great grandsons of curanderos who had 




15 V Beginnings 


survived the Incas, and distant relatives of those who once sat at the feet 
of the Legendary Shaman. They stand on the street corners now, in the 
squares, behind their magic plant stands. Their gods are the Virgin, the 
Holy Father and Mother Cactus, whom they named San Pedro, but 
whose spirit is that kinky hombre. ..Mesailito. 

The weight of all this history didn’t hit Carlos until well after his first 
few years of research. Gradually, he came to realize that the Indians he 
was interviewing were vestiges of the shantanic sweep. They had their 
magic talk and their ritual and their attempts at "seeing," and they 
always seemed to be operating within a system where the cardinal rule 
was to break all bonds. 

In late December I960, Carlos says Don Juan instructed him to get 
rid of his past, leave his friends, sacrifice everything for the new lifestyle. 
The Indians called it becoming a man of knowledge and it entailed the 
rather complex process of erasing one’s personal history, which is 
exactly what Carlos Castaneda did. Though he never says so in his 
books, he actually separated from me in September 1960, left many of 
his friends, began keeping irregular hours, missed appointments at 
UCLA and elsewhere and began spending more time in Mexico. 

By 1965, Carlos had a voluminous manuscript but he was out of 
money and disillusioned with his graduate work and some of the fac- 
ulty members at UCLA. The Teachings, his first book, was published 
almost three years later. The second and third books followed. In the fall 
of 1974, his fourth book, Tales of Power, the conclusion of the tetralogy, 
was published by Simon and Schuster. 

Based on Castaneda's experience in 1971 and 1972, Tales of Power 
carries the apprenticeship to its conclusion. Carlos is led toward the 
full initiation out on the plain, which is where Don Juan finally 
demystifies himself with the sorcerer’s explanation — a detailed dis- 
cussion of the strategies he had used throughout the apprenticeship. 
In a spectacular climax, Carlos watches a fellow apprentice explode in 




16 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


a spray of points and then he, too, feels his awareness shatter into frag- 
ments of pure mind. 

“I’m going to practice," Carlos told me one night in October 1973. “1 
had to go in order to see what they were talking about. I had to write 
about things, very particular things, all important I have nothing now. 
I have my pants, my pantaloons, and that’s all 1 have in the world.” 

Which was a strange thing for the hottest mystic of the Seventies to 
say, considering he had a ballooning cult following, a million dollars in 
the bank, three books published, and a rough draft of a fourth, most of 
it anyway, sitting there on the desk. 

“It won’t come out,” he said in a sort of strange moan. “1 have to work 
my head off, work my poor head off." 

But that wasn't the only thing bothering him. all this business of 
hunching over a goddamn typewriter for months at a time, the night- 
mare and the ending that won’t come. There is something more. The 
real thing bothering him, eating away at his reason like a rabid jackal, 
was that he, Carlos Castaneda, dispassionate chronicler and closet nov- 
elist, was really beginning to believe everything that he had written. 




3 


Much of the Castaneda mystique is based on the fact that even his clos- 
est friends aren’t sure who he is. During the early 1970s, as his books 
grew in popularity, Carlos became more obscure. Until Time magazine 
disclosed in a long cover story in March 1973 that Carlos was from 
Peru, everybody figured that he had come from where he said — Brazil 
or Argentina or Italy, depending to whom you talked. The Time piece 
had a curious effect on Castaneda's following. Those who had grown to 
doubt the enchanting Paleolithic stories of the desert took to the fact 
that he’d lied about his pre-Don Juan days as proof that he was untrust- 
worthy, that his books were fabrications, mere extensions of a total 
sweeping lie which he’d begun long before deciding to write his 
cryptonovels. After all, they reasoned, if he lied about something as con- 
ventional as his place of birth, then why should anyone trust the far 
more incredible stuff in his books? 

Believers saw it differently. If the stories about his past weren't exactly 
true, so much the better. After all, wasn’t he practicing something that 
Don Juan had taught him, something called “erasing your personal his- 
tory” — an elaborate sorcerer’s technique for obfuscating the past? 
Didn’t that prove that he was alive and living in the real world of the 
freeways and news magazines in accordance with the tenets of his meta- 
physical master? If anything, the contradictions served to deepen the 
mysteries of the man. 


17 



IH / A Magical tourney with Carlos Castaneda 


He was suddenly first-class material all right, the doyen of the occult 
fringe, the main man for thousands of hip social drug users searching 
for an alternative perspective. The Castaneda legend ballooned, feeding 
on myths that he, in part, perpetuated. He failed to keep appointments, 
he withdrew for weeks into the Mexican desert, he even kept some of 
his closest friends at a careful distance. He was clearly a man absorbed 
by his own legend when he erased a portion of a pencil sketch done by 
an artist for Psychology Today, leaving only part of his face to accom- 
pany a December 1972 interview, for the Time photographer he 
allowed his picture to be taken, but peered coyly through his fingers and 
from behind a copy of some esoteric sociological tract. The idea was to 
protect his identity and discourage the curious who had begun hound- 
ing hint for information about Don |uan and his magic worldview. All it 
really did was further the myth. 

It's unclear how long it took for him to develop his standard account 
of his past: born in Brazil, the son of a university professor, educated in 
a "very proper" Buenos Aires boarding school, Hollywood High school 
and UCLA, and so on. The truth is a bit more conventional. 

Carlos Osar Salvador Arana Castaneda was born in Cajamarca, 
Peru, on Christmas Day, 1926, the son of a watchmaker and goldsmith 
named Cesar Arana Burungary, who owned a little shop in the down- 
town section of the city. His mother, Susana Castaneda Navoa, was a 
slender, almond-eyed girl of 1 6 when Carlos was bom. His father’s fam- 
ily had come from Italy and had roots in Sao Paulo, Brazil, but most of 
Carlos' immediate family lived in Cajamarca. His sister, Lucia Arana, 
was a constant companion during childhood and is now married to a 
businessman and still lives in Peru. 

Actually, there is some confusion about the spelling of his last name. 
Immigration records show that a Carlos Osar Arana Castaneda entered 
the country in 1951 . But once in America, Carlos often signed his name 
Carlos C. Aranha — with an “h‘ — as in 1957, when he cosigned a tele- 
phone employee’s credit union loan for me, then his girlfriend. This 




19 / Beginnings 


inconsistency apparently stems from a story he was telling friends in 
mid- 1959 about how he was related to Oswaldo Aranha, the Brazilian 
gaucho, revolutionary and skilled diplomat. It was something he could 
n’t say if his name was actually spelled Arana. After taking the name 
Carlos Castaneda, he dropped Aranha altogether, however, he contin- 
ued to make vague references about an unnamed uncle in later inter- 
views with reporters. 

A few months before Carlos was horn, Oswaldo saved the town of 
Itaqui during an eighty-day siege from the rebel forces of Luis Carlos 
Prestos. In the end, Oswaldo dragged a bullet-splintered leg through the 
boiling red dust of the little Brazilian town, grinning and waving his 
pistol in the air like some latter-day cowboy. He had expelled the com- 
munist hordes, saved Itaqui for the government and was well on hLs way 
to a prestigious career. Oswaldo spent the next year recuperating from 
his leg wound and then went on to become president, cabinet member, 
ambassador, and president of the United Nations General Assembly. 
Still, according to Carlos, he kept close tabs on his relatives in Peru. 

“He said his uncle ruled the whole clan," said one old friend. “He told 
everybody what to do. Carlos said Oswaldo sent him money to the 
United States after he got here, but he sent it back to Brazil.” 

The real patriarch of the Castaneda side of the family was Carlos's 
grandfather, a short red-haired Italian immigrant. 1'he craggy-faced 
old man was something of a wit and bears a strong resemblance to 
Carlos’s later descriptions of Don |uan. He was always telling earthy lit 
tie stories that had a twist at the end and all these different levels of 
meaning. He was also inventing things all the time. In the early 1930s, 
the old man completed one of his proudest projects and called the 
whole Castaneda Arana clan together for the unveiling. It was a big day 
around the household. Grandfather Castaneda had been working for 
days on this new invention. When the old man finally yanked away the 
sheet, the aunts howled and Cc'sar, who'd known all along whal’d been 




20 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


built, congratulated his father-in-law's inventive skills. Carlos and his 
cousins weren't so sure. 

“It’s an indoor toilet," the old man said, beaming. “And who'll be first?" 

After arriving in the United States in 1951, Carlos was very selective 
about what he told his friends about himself. A few things slipped 
through, however, often in casual conversation with me, whom he mar- 
ried in Tijuana, Mexico, in January 1 960. 

He told me, for example, that when he was eight months old he 
looked up at his aunt and said " Diablo ” which is Spanish for devil. It 
was his first word, he said. 1-atcr, Carlos gave me advice, answering 
questions and advising me on a variety of personal matters. 

Carlos was an attractive little boy, dark with deep brown eyes, curly 
hair and delicate little hands and feet. He was stocky and short, some- 
thing that later became an obsession with him. As a student in Los 
Angeles, he often talked about how he wished he were taller. As an adult 
he grew only to 5’ 5" and as a child always seemed to be a few inches 
shorter than the others. 

During his early days in Cajamarca, Carlos was an altar boy at the 
Catholic church. The churches were all pretty grim barns in Cajamarca 
in the 1930s, long since stripped of most of their religious paintings and 
silver. They bordered the square in majestic ugliness: San Antonia, El 
Belen, The Cathedral. The Aranas showed the same deference for reli- 
gion as did their middle-class Catholic neighbors. There was some talk 
of Pope Pius XI and there were two color duotones of jesus and the 
Virgin on the walls. In college, Carlos would deny it all, saying he was a 
Hasidic Jew. In his books, he stayed away from conventional mass reli- 
gion altogether. 

He started elementary school about 1932, attending classes in a 
Cajamarca school. After classes and sometimes during the weekends, he 
found himself in Cesar’s little goldsmith shop. There was always some- 
thing the old man was doing, re-springing clocks and spreading new 
coats of gold on cyclopean pocket watches and so forth, but the most 




21 / Beginnings 


intriguing thing in the shop, absolutely the finest, most interesting 
craftsmanship was the way C6iar would make rings. He would take out 
his jeweler’s eye and wink at Carlos and watch the Cajamarca ladies 
bend over the glass, staring at the rows of rings, a sea of rings all gleam- 
ing there in the counter on black velvet. Business was off because of the 
world economic crisis, but still the ladies came to have their jewelry 
repaired and to look at the bracelets and rings. 

Carlos took an interest in working with copper and gold and became 
something of a goldsmith himself. Only there was a big difference 
between himself and his father. Carlos watched C&ar spending so 
much time creating and sweating over his worktable and then simply 
selling everything, with no thought other than the money it was bring- 
ing in. But when Carlos made a bracelet or ring, especially the fancy 
jobs with gold and silver threads intertwined, he wanted to keep it or at 
least give it as a gift to someone who appreciated the care he'd taken. 
Cesar was working at craft; Carlos was working at art. This business of 
selling your creations as though they were blocks of tallow or bags of 
fertilizer or something was crazy. 

Another thing bothered him. Watching the covetous Mestizo 
ladies day after day, Carlos developed an aversion to things he saw as 
hopelessly middle-class. Bor example, he fell the ladies and west-side 
dandies weren't just buying jewelry, but gathering impedimenta. 
The brassy gorditas ofCajamarca were in search of attachments, 
irrelevant objects, the products of truly pedestrian minds. Carlos 
never wore jewelry, but occasionally made something and gave it 
away to a relative or friend, thinking how this was somehow part of 
his rite of passage to the level of artist. 

“I have an uncle, a bachelor who has left me with a 52-room house in 
Brazil," Carlos told me. “He did that because once when I was young. 1 
made a little pinkie ring and gave it to him. He lived in the house by 
himself and because I showed him lhal much attention, he allowed me 
to live in the house. And the house will always be mine, except if I sell it 




12 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


or do anything so that the money goes to the government." Carlos 
claimed that he inherited the house in I960 and that it was later turned 
into a girls' school of some sort. 

Jewelry, art, ceramics and architecture were all inextricably inter- 
twined throughout the history of Peru, so it wasn't so unusual for 
young Carlos to get some vague feeling of the connection. A few years 
later, while studying painting and sculpture at the National Fine Arts 
School of Peru at Lima, Carlos spent hours in public museums and 
private collections, studying early archeological finds. The centuries 
lay in dusty rows of stone plates and bowls, jet mirrors, shell and 
turquoise pendants and beads, bone spatulae, rings, golden false faces 
from mummy bundles. Standing in the dank halls of Lima’s Museum 
of Archaeology, Carlos Arana followed the whole artistic sweep. There 
was the two-dimensional cat god art of the religious cults of the 
Amazon sub-tributaries and the realistic ceramics of the Moches and 
the snuff-brown adobe arabesques in clay relief and the polished and 
elegant Chimu blackware. He saw models of the gut-bust road build- 
ing and temple design of the Incas. Much of the stuff owed a debt to 
the early shamans, the original mystic artists. The vases, for example, 
sometimes showed warriors with small square shields and flange- 
lipped maces gripping the vanquished by the hair in the moment of 
victory. Sometimes there were representations of medicine men 
performing curses — by exorcising spirits or sucking foreign particles 
out of bloody puncture wounds. But the most interesting of these 
were the stirrup-handled Chavinjugs, long rows of them, and espe- 
cially those decorated with jaguars shank-and-jowl with a dozen 
emerald green stalks of San Pedro cactus. 

Much of it Carlos had seen before. The whole atavistic thrust of 3000 
years of Peruvian art history was under the counter at Cesar’s, albeit 
reduced to its lowest common denominator, bastardized, modified 
through a jeweler's eye in the name of convention and altered for accept- 
ability. The real gritty stuff was in the museums and private collections. 




23 I Beginnings 


And il was art — the ceramics and the arabesques and the lemon-drop 
rings, jug drawings, gold ornaments and all the hammered repousse 
decorations they were all real Peruvian art. Carlos studied the lines and 
techniques of these early artists, and he noticed something. The subject 
of much of the work was myth and religion, not Catholicism, but that 
ineffable low-rent Quichua Indian variety. The thing that turned the old 
boys on, the thing that really got their artistic juices moving, was flat -out 
jungle country magic. 

As a boy, he'd heard the curanderos talk about warriors and spirits 
and the like. Folk healing was a big business in Cajamarca, though it 
hardly carried the social cachet of mining, or manufacturing. The 
Aranas were a typical middle-class family and didn’t pay much atten- 
tion to the old-time healers. When Carlos or Lucia were ill, it meant a 
trip to the doctor, not the curandero. The Indians and the poor Mestizos 
and various mountain people from the north coast were the ones with 
faith in the mystics. Carlos found the curanderos mildly interesting, as 
did most of the young boys around Cajamarca, and he would see them 
at the herb stands in the market buying and selling magic plants. They 
would sit behind rickety wooden stands and make pitches for their 
plants, which were sealed in seguros, special glass jelly jars used to pre- 
serve the spirits. Sometimes Carlos saw them talking among themselves 
around the huge empty fountain that still keeps a silent vigil in the cen- 
ter of Plaza dc Armas. The plaza is a spacious grey concrete square that 
serves more or- less as the center of activity for the city. It was the site 
where, centuries before, Pizarro captured Atahualpa and turned the tide 
of Peruvian history. When Carlos was a boy, it had been largely stripped 
and given over to scrawny hedges clipped to simulate various birds and 
animals. On Sundays, the plaza was filled with Hispanic ladies and dark 
Mestizo gentlemen. Occasionally, some imperious cattle-breeder from 
the south would stride across the concrete with manure on his gaucho 
boots and bolo tie around his neck cn route to closing a big deal. 
Sunday afternoons there were great undulating scenes with farmers. 




2* I A Mjgic.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


urchins, west-side dandies, mothers, gentlemen and, of course, the mys- 
terious walleyed shamans of northern Peru. 

Actually, very few of the people Carlos thought were curanderos were 
really curanderos at all. Most were simply old geezers who liked to hang 
around the square. It wasn't like the curatuleros were all wacked-out 
ecstatic visionaries or anything — they were, in fact, infinitely practical 
men. It was hard to distinguish them from the old geezers. Many had 
worked as bricklayers or artists or as netmen on tuna clippers along the 
Pacific Coast. It was just that they were different inside somehow; they 
looked at life in a radically different way, an ancient individualistic way 
that sometimes bothered the city types. 

Somewhere along the line they'd been taken under wing by a knowl- 
edgeable teacher whose job it was to expand their perception and make 
them “see." San Pedro, the magic infusion, activated an inner eye that 
could penetrate the root of pain of illness and injury. It was the doctor, 
not the patient, who took the medicine, and from his altered point of 
view, he could better deal with the cosmic mysteries of suffering. 
Whether it was cancer or a cold or witchcraft (either black or white), the 
cumndero could handle it. He carried with him a vast and meticulous 
tradition. On any given day, you could find a couple of them out on the 
square, talking about plants and spirits and all this gibberish, and then 
somebody would mention the Legendary' Shaman of the Cicama River 
Valley, where the Temple of the Brujo stood, and they'd all nod their 
floppy hats in perfect silent understanding. 

The curanderos of northern Peru have always been a rather knowl- 
edgeable group and remarkably educated about the liner aspects of 
their drugs. They know, for example, that the active alkaloid in San 
Pedro (Trichocerreus pachanoi) is mescaline, to the tune of 1.2 grams 
per kilo. It is not as potent as peyote, its Central and North American 
cousin, which has thirty-eight alkaloids, In 1920, San Pedro cactus was 
first described and classified in the academic literature. N.I.. Britton 
and J.N. Rose found it in Andean Ecuador, where the natives call it 




25 I Beginnings 


agua-colla, giganton and San Pedrillo. By the late 1950s, Western schol- 
ars began to realize that it grew also in Peru and Bolivia. The curan- 
deros, of course, had known that for centuries. 

One modern Peruvian curandero is Eduardo Calderdn Palomino, 
whose picture hangs over Douglas Sharon's desk in his office at UCLA. 
Palomino was Sharon's teacher during his years in the highlands. 
Sharon, who went through his own apprenticeship long before meeting 
Carlos at UCLA, noticed a great number of similarities between the 
teachings of Eduardo and Don Juan. Which is interesting because it 
means either Don |uan is part of a vast oceanic tradition, or he is a char- 
acter drawn less from the Yaquis (who don't use hallucinogens) than 
from the old guys Carlos used to sec in the square at Cajamarca. One 
thing is for sure — Eduardo is a real live magic man of the Peruvian 
coast who knows very well what an evening with Mother Cactus is like. 
As it turns out, it is remarkably similar to what Carlos said. 

“...first a slight dizziness that one hardly notices," says Eduardo. 
"And then a great vision, a clearing of all faculties of the individual. It 
produces a light numbness in the body and afterward a tranquillity. 
And then comes a detachment, a type of visual force in the individual 
inclusive of all senses: seeing, hearing, smelling, touching, etc. — all the 
senses, including the sixth sense, the telepathic sense of transmitting 
oneself across time and matter. It develops the power of perception. . .in 
the sense that when one wants to see something far away, he can distin- 
guish powers or problems or disturbances at a great distance, so as to 
deal with them...” 

What the curandero really wants to do, of course, is move away from 
the ordinary way of perceiving the world toward a separate reality. “One 
must try to make the individual ‘jump out' of his conscious mind. This 
is the principal task of the cuntnderismo. By means of the magical plants 
and the chants and the search for the root of problems, the subcon- 
scious of the individual is opened like a flower, and it releases these 




26 / A M jgit.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


blockages. All by itself, it tells things. A very practical manner... which 
was known to the ancients (of Peru)." 

This kind of thing was not exactly common knowledge, but it was 
hardly new to somebody like Carlos who grew up just south of the 
Peruvian holy lands. Carlos was aware of the folk healers and their deal- 
ings with witchcraft and curing, and beyond that, of their attempts to 
gain a vision apart from the conventional real world. But like so many 
other things, Carlos admitted none of it. 

Finding himself at the home of one of Don luan's friends in August 
1961, Carlos steadfastly pretended to know very little about hallucino- 
gens in general and absolutely nothing about “mescal," which the men 
were passing around on this particular night. The man who owned the 
shack, a dark, hulking Indian about 50 years old, was interested in 
South America and the Quichas, and he asked Carlos if there was any 
mescal down there. Carlos shook his head. Novice to the end, he said 
he’d never even heard of it. 

There’s no indication that young Carlos was ever let in on the inner 
workings of Peruvian magic. Everybody around Cajamarca knew that 
the old boys would get rocking horse crazy on Mother Cactus, apoca 
lyptically wasted on the stuff. But what they didn't understand was why. 
It was one thing to catch the obvious visual manifestations — the chants, 
the ecstatic dances, the wild gesticulations of a confident healer plying 
his art. But it was quite another thing to perceive every subliminal 
flicker, to arrange in a clear orderly way in the cerebral cortex every 
mystery, every abstruse working of the sorcerer's divine system. This 
was the thing the apprentice had to do, and it didn't make any difference 
whether the apprentice was Peruvian or Mexican. 

“I would say there are structural parallels in the sense that he might 
have picked up a receptivity by growing up in a milieu where every- 
body was talking about curanderos ,” Sharon says of his colleague. “They 
were part of the folklore. In Peru, you find them selling herbs on every 
street corner. It’s an everyday event. He would have been brought up 




27 I Beginnings 


thoroughly imbued with that kind of thing. But as far as really being 
familiar with the philosophical and structural underpinnings of 
shamanism per se. being socialized in an environment where this kind 
of thing was going on. would not necessarily prepare you to go all the 
way, which is what I think he has now done" 




4 


One of Carlos's favorite activities as a boy was flying kites. It was all very 
popular around his neighborhood. He spent hours running along the 
windy hillsides of the Cajamarca Basin, trailing a kite he'd just made. He 
considered himself something of an expert at kite tlying and later at the 
more mature sport of falcon hunting. Sometimes he went out alone to 
hunt game. The Arana family appreciated his efforts and congratulated 
him for providing incidental wild meat for meals. His aunts and uncles 
would make a serious show of gratitude when little Carlitos would 
bring in some birds, calling them “pheasants." 

There was an albino falcon that Carlos says he chased an entire sum- 
mer. It had become something of a menace to the farmers. Carlos says 
he’d look up and suddenly here would come this bird making a mad 
sweep out of the sky, grabbing a stray leghorn around the belly and then 
making for the horizon like a vertiginous lightning bolt; there was 
nothing anybody could do about it. 

Carlos’s grandfather, a wiry, red-haired old chicken farmer, had 
declared war on the ghost bird and predicted that before the summer 
was over, those jaundice-yellow claws would be dangling from a 
Barbasco vine on the porch, twisting in the breeze next to the bamboo 
wind chime. But the bird wasn’t about to let this happen. Even during 
long ntidnight watches, neither the old man nor little Carlos would see 
it until too late and the ghost bird was soaring off with another chicken. 


28 



29 / Beginnings 


This went on for weeks until one day Carlos ran across the falcon 
perched on the top branch of an Australian Eucalyptus. Slowly he raised 
the sights of his .22 rifle with the red square. One shot and there'd be a 
blizzard of white feathers in the branches. One shot and it was all over, 
lust one shot. ..only he couldn’t do iL There was no way Carlos could 
bring himself to pull the trigger. 

He says it took him twenty years to find out why. Twenty years before 
meeting Don |uan, he finally understood that wasn’t just some bird 
there in the Eucalyptus, not just some albino falcon, but an omen, a sig- 
nal. It was absolutely correct to say that something seemed to grip him. 
as he stood there squinting down the sight of his rifle in that steamy yel 
low Peruvian morning. His Death advised him, his wisest advisor, the 
spectral figure that stands always to the left — Death told him not to kill 
the omen, whether Carlos knew it or not. It all made perfect sense in the 
primitive shaman ic scheme of things, but the explanation was years 
away and so young Carlos understood only that he had failed somehow. 
And that notion of self-defeat, Carlos says, was the dominant theme of 
his childhood. Carlos maintains that he was fearful and lonely as a boy. 
The reasons are not clear. Shortly after arriving in America, he told a 
few people of cruel and sometimes bizarre treatment he suffered at the 
hands of various cousins. Apparently, this mistreatment caused him to 
begin losing his self-confidence and, to some extent, his self-respect. He 
never really pushed the idea, but some people got the impression that 
Carlos’ field work in Mexico and his years writing were more or less a 
test of his own worth than anything else. 

In one of many long rambling conversations with me. Carlos 
recounted the incident of the button nose boy that later appeared in A 
Separate Reality. In the fall of 1934, Carlos was a third grade student at a 
Cajamarca elementary school. He had begun to stand up to his cousins 
and furthermore, had begun to tease and bully the younger, weaker 
children. One of them was a button-nose boy named joaquin, a first 
grader who had a habit of hanging around Carlos. One day, without 




30 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


really thinking, Carlos shoved a blackboard over on loaquin, snapping 
the boy's collarbone. When he looked down at Joaquin, seeing the pain 
and his mangled little arm, it was more than he could bear. 

At least that’s the way he wrote about it. In his earlier conversation 
with me, he left out the moral, as he always did. It is as if he were trying 
out his stories in advance. Friends recall hearing dozens of scenarios 
well before they appeared in one of Carlos' books, albeit in skeletal form 
and devoid of the little sorcerer’s aper^u that characterize so many of 
his adventures with Don Juan. 

In his conversation with me about the button-nose boy, Carlos neg- 
lected to include a moral. It was only after he wrote about it in A 
Separate Reality that I learned that he had been defeated in strength and 
had, in a moment of compassion, given the little boy an important 
gift — all his victories. Carlos concluded from his experience with the 
boy that his place in the scheme of things was that of a victim. And he 
says it took Don Juan to change his loser s attitude. 

It’s just the kind of moralizing that has prompted some critics to 
question whether Carlos is more con than mystic. But just because 
much in the books is didactic doesn’t mean certain things didn't hap 
pen at all. The fact is that all of the material in Carlos's books is 
absolutely true. 

Carlos Castaneda actually met an Indian during the summer of 1 960, 
when he said he did. In fact, he met several informants, some of whom 
taught him about drug use and shamanism. He did spend years in 
Mexico talking to Indians and studying their way of life. He was, in fact, 
born in South America, although it was Peru and not Brazil, a distinc- 
tion that Carlos himself doesn’t think is very important. 

“To ask me to verify my life by giving you my statistics is like using 
science to validate sorcery. It robs the world of its magic and make mile- 
stones of us all,” he says. 

The story about his father being a university professor may have been 
a lie, but is also indicative of the way Carlos uses words such as “father” 




31 I Beginnings 


and “mother" as symbols. When talking about his father and mother, he 
didn’t necessarily mean that the same real-world couple who came 
together and bore him. It was more a matter of symbol, of spirit, and 
once one understands that kink in the Castaneda psyche, the books 
become much more understandable. Again, it is a question of how 
much is con and how much is mystic, but one thing is for sure: certain 
roles in his books, and in Carlos’s real life, are often interchangeable and 
not determined by biology or some other real world definition. His 
characters and stories are often a product of perception and circum- 
stance. When Carlos writes about his weak-willed father, he is really- 
talking about himself. 

“I am my father,” he says. "Before I met Don |uan I would spend 
years sharpening my pencils, and then getting a headache every time I 
sat down to write. Don luan taught me that’s stupid. If you want to do 
something, do it impeccably, and that’s all that matters." 

In August 1967, he wrote to me: “I went back to your old apt. in the 
Valley a couple of days and got an attack of profound sentimentalism. 
You are my family dearest, dearest Margarita. I felt that as I drove away. 
What emptiness you have left in my soul! It is the emptiness of losing 
something irreplaceable; the emptiness of those who long even though 
they are busy and in the company of people." 

It wasn’t just in his books but in private conversations back in the 
1950s that he was disparaging his father, calling him an intellectual, a 
teacher, a literary man who had never written a thing. He talked with 
me from time to time about the man, saying what he really disliked was 
that his father was average, that everything ran on schedule. “I never 
want to be like that,” he told me. 

On the other hand, Carlos wanted the security and prestige of 
being an educated man, of getting a Ph.D., of becoming a man of 
knowledge, in the conventional sense. And yet, he feared he might 
become a flatulent hack, hopping buses to classes, making the rounds 
of faculty parties and the rest of it. Carlos Arana didn’t want to be 




32 / A Magic.ll Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


average, but more than that, he didn't know. So what he did was to 
construct a straw man. He threw it up before him, like a map of the 
image “father." and publicly railed against it, trying in his own life to 
avoid those areas he feared, those characteristics about himself that he 
hated. The father he discusses in his books (and had begun discussing 
long before his literary career ever began), was himself. Or more accu- 
rately, it was the image of a man, taken partly from CcSar, whom he 
wanted desperately not to become. 

His descriptions of "mother" are made up equally of real-life detail 
and fertile imagination. The woman he mentions in his books and 
discussed with friends was a composite of myself, various friends 
from college days and a somewhat romantic vision of Susana Navoa 
Castaneda, whom he described to acquaintances as “very beautiful 
and just like a child.” 

In the classroom at the University of California at Irvine, where 
Carlos taught in the spring of 1972, John Wallace recalls this description 
of his mother: 

She would say to Carlos, “Nobody has given me anything. I have no 
diamond ring.” Carlos said that she would cry and that he cried with the 
woman because she did not have a diamond ring. When Carlos told 
Don Juan about the matter, Don Juan said, “If nobody gave her any- 
thing, the world was hers to take. If a man can liberate himself from the 
terror of being alive, that would truly be enough.” 

But that wasn’t his mother he was talking about, it was me. There’s 
little indication he ever told that story before 1 960; that's because it was 
me who provided him with the substance for it. I, not Susana, bothered 
him for a ring. And it was me, not his real mother, whom he had in 
mind that afternoon talking to his graduate class at Irvine. His mother 
could have had a ring at any time, since his father was a jeweler. 

In A Separate Reality, Carlos recalls a peyote vision in which his 
mother appears and tells him something. He recalls her laughter and the 
way she would shuffle around the old house in floppy house slippers. 



33 I Beginnings 


Again, he appears to have appropriated a characteristic of mine and 
plugged it into his literary character of "mother." In the spring of 1958, 1 
bought a pair of floppy gold and silver house slippers, a purchase 1 
remember well because Carlos hated them. He disliked particularly the 
way I shuffled around the apartment in them. “They are so awful," he 
said finally, “that I'm going to have them and someday I'm going to take 
them to my house." He took the slippers, presumably to be stored among 
a collection of things he supposedly was keeping in his 52- room 
Brazilian mansion. The image of me in my slippers stayed with him and 
he had no problem using it in his expanding description of “mother." 




5 


After spending three years in high school at Cajamarca, Carlos moved 
with his family to Lima. It was a great bustling city in 1948. much bigger 
than his hometown, (iron Union, a narrow winding street stretching six 
blocks through the city's shopping center, connected two large and 
elaborate squares. It was in Lima that Carlos graduated from Colegio 
Nacional de Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe and decided to turn his 
strength toward painting and sculpture, liven as a boy he'd felt drawn 
toward art. A creative youngster, his greatest desire was to become a 
respected artist. 

The years in Cesar’s shop in Cajamarca had provided Carlos with the 
underpinnings of a strange sort of artistic education. He had a good 
fortune of working with precious metals. For a Peruvian artist, Lima 
was the place to be. The artists were everywhere, sketching and painting 
on lawns and in alley rooms, creating art in a city that was the cradle of 
art on South America's Pacific Coast. 

There was fine sixteenth century architecture — the elaborate facade 
of San Augustine and San Francisco’s labyrinthine interior, and there 
was marble and stone and the incredibly noble construction of the 
Presidential Palace adjacent to the Cathedral. There were parapets and 
crenellations and bartizans and a noble skyline of black spires and 
domes. Peru’s artistic and anthropological history was well preserved 
and gathered in a dozen museums. Among them was the Historical 


.M 



35 I Beginnings 


Museum, presided over by novelist lose Maria Arguedas, a place where 
portraits of all the country's viceroys and liberators hung on the cream 
stucco in perfect timeless attention. And there were the bizarre nine 
teenth century surrealistic tableaux that covered entire walls. It was, for 
all practical purposes, a great city for art and history. To Carlos's mind, 
a most impressive place. 

Susana Castaneda Navoa died in 1949. Carlos’ sister remembers 
that when it happened, Carlos was grief-stricken. He refused to attend 
the funeral and locked himself in his room for three days without eat- 
ing. During those days alone, he began reconsidering the rather deep 
and sentimental feelings he had toward his mother, and by extension, 
the feelings he had developed for a great number of people and places 
and things. Carlos was by his nature emotionally dependent on 
Susana, even in his early 20s. His mother’s death was a crushing blow. 
He remembered the old families in Cajamarca during the world 
depression and the fat gorditas of his father’s jewelry shop, those fat 
ladies who came in steady streams and who put so much value on 
rings and bracelets, the ones who were locked in — I was exactly like 
those ladies. He called it, “my attachment to trinkets” hopelessly 
entangled in webs of impedimenta. 

He'd always thought of himself as a weak person and attributed that, 
at least in part, to his dependency on others, particularly his mother. 
When she died, Carlos was suddenly adrift on a desperate grey sea. The 
rest of the family was upset by the death, of course, but not totally 
crushed. During those three days in his room, Carlos concluded that his 
attachment to his mother had been too strong and the only way to 
avoid that kind of thing in the future was to fight his more comfortable 
notions of attachment and dependency. It would be a matter of break- 
ing all bonds or at least limiting them until he could reach that point. 

In his books, he attributes this idea to Don Juan and writes how the 
old Indian instructed him to avoid lapses of self-pity and introspection, 
directing him always toward the truth that real-world attachments 




3/> / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


make one vulnerable. It sounds all very mystical in the books, but the 
fact of the matter is that his mother's death hurt him and he wanted to 
avoid that kind of thing in the future. When Carlos finally stepped out 
into the hallway outside his room, his sister remembers, he announced 
that he was leaving home. 

Carlos began studying painting and sculpture at the National Fine 
Arts School of Peru, feeling as he did that he had a natural artistic abil- 
ity and the drive to become a fine artist. It was not so much fame he was 
searching for, but approval from those he knew. The plan was to go to 
America as soon as he saved enough money. He would soak up the 
Hispanic culture of Lima and then travel to New York or Los Angeles or 
someplace where people were not so aware of South American influ- 
ences in art. He'd have the tools to turn out the stuff expertly, make a 
big splash somewhere and be set for life. 

It was about this time that Oswaldo Aranha returned to his home 
in Rio after an impressive term in New York as president of the United 
Nations General Assembly. Before that, he served for twelve years as a 
cabinet minister and four years in Washington as an ambassador to 
the U.S. He was one of the most famous men in South America, a con 
tinental hero, and when he returned to his own native black Brazilian 
soil, there was much talk of the old man and his years in the United 
States. No doubt about it, Carlos intended to go there just as soon as 
he learned enough. 

As a student, Carlos spent time in museums and art galleries, pick 
ing up hints, studying technique, looking for the parameters within 
which he'd develop his own unique style. Some of his fellow students at 
the National Fine Arts School were pretty good and sometimes there 
were these fears in the back of Carlos's mind that maybe he just didn't 
have it, that maybe he wasn't good enough to make a living as an artist. 
It was going to be especially tough in post-WWIl America, where for- 
eign painters and sculptors were engaged in a fearsome highbrow 
competition in a dozen cities. Ultimately, it was a battle for style and 




37 I Beginnings 


recognition, and Carlos figured he'd be successful once he refined 
some of his sculpting techniques. Painting was important, of course, 
but sculpture caught his interest like no other medium. Wood, soap 
stone and especially terra cotta — all of it intrigued him. Carlos sud- 
denly found himself further than ever from the dull and 
inconsequential life. Older and more mature and away from his family, 
Carlos Arana began seeing himself not as a weak and acquiescent boy, 
but as a confident and aggressive student. He moved easily among peo 
pie and developed a free and unstructured lifestyle, almost bohemian. 
His manner was always charming — giving his full attention to the per- 
son he was with. )os£ Bracamonte, one of his fellow students at the 
National Fine Arts School, remembers him as free and easygoing. 
Bracamonte says his old friend lived mainly off gambling, or seemed 
to. His tools were cards, horses and dice. 

“We all liked Carlos," Bracamonte says. “He was witty, imaginative, 
cheerful — a big liar and a real friend." And he remembers that Carlos 
"harbored like an obsession" a desire to move to the United States. 

His work was more than just a matter of mastering contemporary oil 
and acrylics and terra cotta. There was the need to understand the con 
tinent’s artistic sweep, those rolling centuries of South American high 
art. Carlos studied Chavin art, Mochica culture, the ubiquitous imprint 
of Tinuanaco architecture — every highlight and vicissitude in two mil- 
lennia of Peruvian artistry. The museums and galleries of Lima were 
well stocked with exceptionally good pieces of highlands art. All Carlos 
had to do was read the texts, go to class, check the galleries and develop 
his own style. 

The Larco Herrera Museum had a fine collection of pre Columbian 
artifacts, including long walls of Mochica pottery and Chimu black- 
ware, and there were the displays at the Historical Museum and the uni- 
versity. But the really intriguing collections were those in Lima’s 
Museum of Archaeology, the rotund stirrup-handled jugs that the 
ancient cunmderos once used to carry their holy infusions. The Chavin 




3# / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


vessels were the end product of an evolution from hollow gourds and 
clay pots used by the Stone Age magicians of the Peruvian mountain- 
sides. And now here they were in dusty chaotic displays — showing 
jaguars, curarulews, warriors and green columnar stalks of San Pedro, 
back from the lavender peaks and the jungles and the early iniiota of 
the holy men who ate when they felt like it and worked when it suited 
them and slept wherever they chose. They had broken the bonds of con 
vention and truly lived the free life. 

As an art student, Carlos was more interested in the style and tech- 
nique of historical artifacts, not their place along the shamanic sweep. 
The subjects of magic and sorcery came up occasionally among the 
students at the National Fine Arts School, but for Carlos it was all 
pretty distant from his main aim, which was to become a sensitive and 
respected artist. He knew about the Twentieth Century healers of his 
native Cajamarca, but that wasn’t something he thought about very 
much. There was his art and the loose and easy life around him, the 
college life, and there were the card games and the horse races and the 
wine-drinking with friends. He was attracted to intelligent, unconven- 
tional and creative people; he began hanging around with artists and 
dandies. There were writers and poets everywhere, and there were 
always art shows and poetry readings and long distended dialogues on 
limenez and Lorca. 

Carlos told friends in America that he became so unmanageable that 
Oswaldo shipped him off to the States. According to that story, one of 
the reasons for Oswaldo’s dissatisfaction was that Carlos had become 
quite friendly with a Chinese girl who smoked opium. It was, he said, 
his first contact with drugs. Carlos contends he arrived in New York, but 
his immigration records show that he arrived in 1951 in San Francisco. 
Later, he traveled to Los Angeles. 

Lydette Maduro, who lived with her mother and father in 
Hollywood, was one of Carlos’s good friends during his early days in 
Los Angeles. He called her Nanecca and saw her frequently prior to the 




39 I Beginnings 


end of 1955. It was Lydette, as I recalled, who brought Carlos to my 
apartment in December of that year. Mrs. Angela Madura, Lydette’s 
mother, had made two cocktail dresses for me and wanted her daughter 
to deliver them. Carlos accompanied her on the errand. I was living at 
5301 W. 8th Street in an apartment building owned by my aunt. When 
the two of them arrived at the apartment. 1 asked that they wait a 
moment while I tried on the dresses. Carlos walked silently to the cor- 
ner of the room and sat down. Lydette helped me change and we meas- 
ured and tugged at the dresses to make sure they were right. It wasn't 
until on her way out that l ydette introduced her companion. 

“Oh Margarita, this is my friend Carlos from South America,” 
Lydette said. 

He was a short dark man, with black curly hair that gathered in a 
dangling cluster of tiny curls at the forehead. His eyes were large and 
brown, and the left iris floated out a bit, giving the impression that one 
eye was always looking beyond you. It was a flaw that he sought to hide 
by squinting quizzically or looking away, which made him seem 
painfully shy. He had the look of a high countryman, short but slim 
with an ample chest, thin eyebrows, a broad, ingratiating smile and the 
aquiline nose of one with more than a random share of Indian genes. 
Though he said nothing, I found him intriguing. 

A few day's later, 1 made a trip to the Maduros' to pick up the finished 
dresses. Anticipating that Carlos would be there, I carried with me a 
copy of The Search, a spiritual book written by my mystic and guru, 
Neville Goddard. He was there and seemed genuinely pleased by my gift 
and we talked for a while about Sao Paulo and art. Carlos explained that 
he was an artist and would like to do a bust of me, preferably in terra 
cotta, which was his specialty. It was the kind of promise he'd often use 
to flatter women. In the front of The Search I had written my name, 
address and telephone number. We talked for a moment about Neville, 
but there wasn't really much time. Carlos promised to read the book 
and return it to me. 




40 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


A native of Barbados, Goddard had moved to the United States and 
had become relatively well-known along the West Coast as a teacher. 
Earlier in his life, he had taken an Indian teacher named Abdullah, 
learned what he figured was the meaning of everything and now spent 
his days traveling between Los Angeles, San Francisco and New York, 
lecturing and writing. His spiel was vintage mystic — William Blake, the 
Bible, an occasional Platonic reference — giving the whole thing a schol- 
arly respectability. Neville had a commanding physical presence and a 
slow, powerful delivery. He spoke the way he wrote, which is to say in a 
kind of uncluttered Kahlil Gibran prose. I attended all his lectures and 
bought all his pamphlets and books. “God is I AM ness consciousness,” 
said Neville. “Christ is your wonderful human imagination." “Nothing," 
he preached from the podium at the Wilshire Ebell Theatre, “absolutely 
nothing is without significance.” But Neville felt that man couldn't 
understand the ultimate internal meaning of the Cosmic Nexus, as it 
were, and instead sees the world as a moving panorama of meaningless 
events. The mystic often alluded to Plato's allegory of the cave and 
quoted from the Hebrews about how “things which are seen and were 
not made of things which do appear" and so forth. The real gasper, 
though, was from William Blake. He'd sometimes conclude with it, 
standing there at the podium and saying with that great booming 
British accent, “All that you behold, tho’ it appears without, it is within, 
in your imagination, of which this world of mortality is but a 
shadow. ..and one day, like Nebuchadnezzar, you’ll awake and find that 
you've never lived and never died except in the dream." 

During I.ydette and Carlos's first visit to my apartment in December, 
I mentioned that I planned to attend a Neville lecture that evening. And 
later, finding Girlos at Lydette’s, I ran over a couple of Neville’s precepts 
when 1 handed Carlos the book. My purpose in loaning the book was 
two-fold. 1 did believe quite deeply in Neville and often did a bit of 
proselytizing on the side when I had the opportunity. But I also wanted 
to see Carlos again and figured that one good way was by writing my 




41 I Beginnings 


name and telephone number on the inside front cover of The Search. 
Thinking he would certainly notice it, I waited for the call. 

For six months, there was nothing. But 1 didn’t give up. Instead, 1 
employed one of Neville's curious mystical teachings, something he 
called “controlled imagination" (controlled dreaming), which boiled 
down to concentrating intensely on a goal until it became a reality. 
Neville encouraged his students to raise their wishes through dreams to 
an unconscious urge. He told them to consider what they wanted to 
accomplish and to concentrate on the end desire at night in bed before 
falling asleep. Sleep sealed the instructions given the subconscious 
mind. So, for six months 1 focused all of my mental energy and on a 
Saturday night at 9 PM in |une 1 956, Carlos called and asked if he could 
stop by and bring along some paintings he had done. 

1 asked about Lydette, whom 1 assumed would accompany him. 
But Carlos answered as if he hadn’t the slightest idea who Lydette 
was. At first, I thought it was a gag, that Carlos was merely pointing 
out that he'd be alone. But later I found this is the way Carlos often 
did it. He had a habit of going full-bore into relationships and then 
breaking them off suddenly, sometimes pretending he had never 
heard of the person. 

“I used to fall madly in love,” says Carlos, “cling to the poor girl and 
then — pow! — it was all over and she'd been used up and 1 was looking for 
a new girl to fall for. It's a social pattern we learn to repeat and repeat until 
we get old and say, ‘There’s no love, no excitement left. I’m ready to die.’ 
It's a pattern we take for granted — we think there's no other possibility. 

“Well, Don Juan told me to stop all that. He said making romance 
the sole purpose of your life — or making anything the sole purpose 
was ridiculous. Of course, if someone crosses your path you have that 
sense of the marvelous, that here is yet another wonder, you must 
give your awareness to that. But you must tap others only lightly — 
not use them up.” 




6 


In (he summer of 1955 he enrolled under the name Carlos Castaneda at 
Los Angeles Community College, a collection of aging brick buildings 
on Vermont Street, just south of Hollywood. The old buildings have 
since been replaced by cinder block bungalows and tacky yellow brick 
classrooms which encircle a yard festooned with palmettos and desert 
shrubs. Construction on the new buildings began just as Carlos 
Castaneda graduated and moved on to UCLA. 

His records, still on file at LACC, say he was born on December 25, 
1 93 1, and confirm that he was from Peru. It was one of the last times be 
would designate Peru as his homeland. It’s unclear why he first began 
lying about where he was from, but it might have had to do with his 
sense of achieved status. It was better in his mind that his cultural and 
artistic roots were in the rich, intellectual gauche-country of Brazil, not 
Peru, where everybody was perceived as poverty stricken and the back- 
ward peasants and superstitious Indians were better known than the 
middle-class strivers who populated the larger cities. 

The whole idea of coming to the United States was to get a good edu- 
cation and, hopefully, become an established artist, which he wasn't 
having much success with during the early going. The competition was 
stiff and Carlos began to doubt himself, thinking he just might not have 
it. During leisure hours he began writing poetry and short fiction, usu- 
ally romantic stories, but he wondered if there was any talent there 


42 



43 I Beginnings 


either. He was an extremely private person, gracious and charming with 
small groups of friends, but more withdrawn around strangers. He did 
not go to parties, opting instead for cultural exhibits, his art and his 
studies. His liberal arts studies at LACC included, in his first two years, 
a course in journalism as well as the usual undergraduate fare of science 
and literature. In addition, he enrolled in two creative writing courses, 
just to tap the juices. Vernon King, his creative writing instructor, was 
one of the first persons to really analyze Carlos’s fiction and poetry, 
making suggestions and giving him encouragement. 

During the first couple of years at 1 -ACC, Carlos lived in a sparse lit- 
tle apartment with a kitchen on Madison Street near the campus. I 
brought some curtains and put them up and generally helped arrange 
his room. He made few friends, preferring to return to his room to 
study, or paint and write. During this time, we dated occasionally. He 
was older now, quieter, somehow more reserved, his attitude more 
serious than in his Lima days. He was more mature than most of the 
students at LACC. After all, Carlos had enrolled at 29 years old, even 
though his school records said he was 24, and he had a few years on 
most of the young hometown crowd, who’d decided to take their fresh 
man and sophomore years at the small college. His goal was an 
Associate of Arts degree and then off to UCLA or USC or Stanford or 
someplace. Carlos wasn't sure. If he couldn’t make it as an artist, he'd 
make it as a teacher at the college level, perhaps in psychology, since his 
major was pre-psychology, or maybe in archaeology or anthropology 
or literature. Sometimes, he'd think teaching wouldn't be so bad, but at 
other times that damned specter of the flatulent professor rose up, that 
ignominious curse! 

Carlos enjoyed being with Lydette. She didn’t question him about his 
past and when he seemed discouraged she offered gentle support. 
Nonetheless, by mid- 1956, he was seeing more of me and we went to art 
exhibits together. There were also ballets, concerts, lectures and the 
usual fare of cultural events around college and university campuses. 




44 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


And Carlos developed a passion for the mov ies, especially Russian films 
and Ingmar Bergman film classics. 

All of this developed after his first visit, when Carlos brought his 
oil paintings over to me. Me proudly showed off his paintings. They 
were highly stylized and colorful. One was of an old black man or 
shadowy Amazon Tribesman hunched over his drum and beating out 
a furious rhythm with waves of motion rolling off his back. Carlos sat 
on the divan next to nie, holding each painting up and explaining his 
various influences — Dali, Gusone, Dore, El Greco, Goya and so on. 
They were bold, almost primitive designs, and to my mind, they were 
pretty good. But Carlos seemed to have these ambivalent feelings. His 
work was good, but there were too many rough edges that needed 
work. It was something that time and experience might solve; but I 
noticed sometimes in the moody flicker of his smile, an uncertainty 
in his own ability. 

I went to the kitchen and took out a bottle of Mateus wine, which 
became Carlos' favorite, and which he jokingly referred to as his most 
valuable teacher. It was not his art that impressed me this particular 
evening, but the mere fact that he had come to visit. His mere presence 
verified Neville’s mystical technique. For six months, I had tried “con 
trolled imagination” — I imagined being with him, talking with him and 
being most happy with him — and now here he was. Something beyond 
logic had compelled Carlos to come and there was no way you would 
convince me otherwise. 

Before the evening was over, I was talking about Neville and "con- 
trolled imagination" and the New Mysticism, which brings all of your 
senses into play — you see, hear, feel, and smell all that you imagine you 
already have and then let it go. Three days before, I had listened to 
Neville discuss “controlled imagination" and quote from the Song of 
Solomon about how someone searches at night on the bed for the soul 
of the person he loves. 




45 I Beginnings 


He taught that dreams have a peculiar power and dreamers can, 
under the right circumstances, manipulate the dream and select from a 
variety of thoughts those few that are powerful. Neville’s idea was to 
pick a relaxed situation, such as on the bed at night before sleep, and 
create a scenario in the mind which implies that you already have what- 
ever it is you want. That’s all there is to it. By acting as if the wish were 
already a reality, the wish, more often than not, becomes reality. To set 
up dreaming, Neville suggested that his students coast gently to the 
edge of sleep and concentrate on one object, one goal. Slowly, the divi- 
sion between dream and real life becomes arbitrary — they become the 
same, there is no difference. All I knew for sure was that 1 practiced 
“controlled imagination" religiously and suddenly here was Carlos in 
the tlesh, in my apartment, showing off his acrylic paintings. 

Carlos was not convinced. But he was interested in this idea that 
dreams and real life are equally valid in the scheme of things. And he 
was intrigued by Neville’s faith in dreams and his attempts to manipu- 
late them. 

The theoretical unity of the dream and real life was an old idea, La 
Vida es Stieiio (Life is a Dream) was standard reading for Cajamarca 
school children. Pedro Calderdn de la Barca, that devil-bearded Jesuit 
and baroque dramatist, had seen life as a shadow, a snaky penumbra 
trailing the dream, But it was more than the message that attracted 
Carlos, it was Neville himself. He was so mysterious. Nobody was really 
sure who he was or where he had come from. There were vague refer 
ences to Barbados in the West Indies and his being the son of an ultra- 
rich plantation family, but nobody knew for sure. They couldn't even l>e 
sure about thus Addullah business, his Indian teacher, who was always 
way back there in the jungle, or someplace. The only thing you really 
knew was that Neville was here and that he might be back next week, 
but then again... 

There was a certain power in that position, an appealing kind of 
freedom in the lack of past and Carlos knew it. Neville wasn’t the only 




•16 I A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


mystic in town during the mid-1950s. The whole California coastline 
was beginning to stir under the influence of an emerging band of psy- 
chics and practitioners of extrasensory perception. 

The reigning dean of the paranormal was |.B. Rhine, an American 
botanist who had been engaged in psychic research since the late 1920s. 
It was Rhine who coined the words extrasensory perception and psi (for 
psychic phenomenon). Working out of his laboratory at Duke 
University, Rhine studied his test animals and various “sensitives" who 
read cards they could not see. Much of the data suggesting fantastic suc- 
cesses for ESP served as ammunition for the faithful out among the 
doubters. An enthusiastic group of psychic aficionados emerged in Los 
Angeles and San Francisco. There were science fiction collectives and 
spiritual cults and mystery- philosophers like Neville, all together in a 
great bursting popular scene. High school students were writing term 
papers in the 1950s about the "new" psi phenomenon. The college lec- 
ture circuits were suddenly glutted with psychic experts who joined hip 
young poets and folkies on the bill, Hollywood made it unanimous — by 
cranking out a series of instant sci-fi and flying saucer movies. 

Carlos found himself in the middle of this. He generally avoided this 
kind of ersatz occultism. The curatulero as magic man had been a prod- 
uct of the unenlightened masses. But now you had intelligent college 
kids from upper middle-class families caught up in this bizarre talk of 
psychic research, and here I was. a slender and rational girl, suddenly 
babbling on at him about a Barbados-born mystic as if he were the 
Buddha. It wasn't just happening in California, of course. There were 
housewives and mechanics looking out their windows at the red 
Georgia landscape, and Texas dentists, Iowa farmers and a thousand 
others, all searching for something, something, that had a suspicious 
look as if maybe it were green and glowing and doing impossible 
maneuvers in the black spectral night sky. fcveryone was into this occult 
business in one form or another, and we were no exception. 




7 


Carlos began seeing me frequently after that first visit. Unlike l.ydette, I 
asked about his background, and so he told me a story about how he 
actually had been born in Italy on Christmas Day 1931, the son of a 16 
year-old girl who had been attending finishing school in Switzerland. 
His father, a professor, had been on tour around the world when he met 
Susana Navoa. A maternal aunt came to Italy and took custody of 
Carlos shortly after he was born, returning him to the family farm near 
Sao Paulo, Brazil. He grew up on the farm, attending local schools until 
he was old enough to go to Italy, where he enrolled in art school. After 
studying there, he came to the United States, arriving in New York as an 
immigrant at the edge of the great unfolding American continent. He 
talked about attending art schools in Montreal and New York, but he 
was never very specific. 

At this point, there didn't seem to be any systematic purpose for lying 
to me or for lying earlier to l.ydette. However, it did make him appear 
more worldly and gave his paintings and sculpture a certain heightened 
importance; but it wasn't as if his lies were part of a broad plan or any- 
thing. There was no dogma attached, no metaphysical significance for 
scrambling details of his past. That happened later, when he says Don 
Juan urged him to erase personal history. At this point, it was simply 
that he enjoyed telling these stories. He seemed to thrive on it. .As he 


47 


4H I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


told them he began adding neat little morals and friends began to 
notice that Carlos’s stories increasingly took on a didactic edge. 

One night when he was particularly depressed, as he was often was, 
I asked why he didn't smile more. It was not enough for Carlos to dis- 
cuss — he had to moralize. He was a serious person and he wanted me 
to know there was nothing wrong with that. If anybody had a prob- 
lem, it was me, “for being so damned frivolous," he said. Sometimes, I 
would talk about the silliest things, totally insignificant things, like 
clothes or the color of the new curtains over his sink or something else 
equally pedestrian. 

Carlos told me about the time he was in the Army and was 
wounded and got the scar on his lower abdomen and groin. It was a 
serious wound and as he tottered there on the edge of death, every 
existential question crashed through his skull, That’s when he 
became so serious. 

“It was dark when the enemy came,” he said, in pitch-black night, 
and he was in bed. He was serving in the Intelligence division in Spain 
or Korea or someplace; it was never really clear. Suddenly, he was roused 
from sleep by the cries of buddies. By the time he realized what had 
happened, everyone in his squad either had escaped or was dead, and 
only he was left in camp. Somehow, they had missed him. Carlos sat up 
perfectly still, squinting into the darkness and listening for any sound. 
For a long time there wasn't anything. And then, suddenly they were 
there, looming in front of him, looming spectral figures which he knew 
absolutely had brought his death. They grabbed him, maybe a half- 
dozen of them, and they jerked him up oft the ground and wrapped his 
ankles with rope and then strung him to a tree. Dangling there upside 
down, his mind flashed pure panic. He barely saw the bayonet that 
somebody slammed into his abdomen, slicing into the groin. Blood 
gushed out and down, covering his stomach and chest and shoulders 
and hair, and the pain exploded in his head. 




49 / Beginnings 


When he woke up he was spread-eagled on a stainless steel bed with 
doctors talking solemnly over him. The doctors weren't aware that 
Carlos was conscious enough to hear the conversation. They concluded 
among themselves that he would not live. 

Carlos told me that at that moment he decided that, if allowed to 
live, he would be a different person. Given the opportunity, he'd make 
every minute count. Everything, he knew in that electric transcendent 
moment, everything is very important. 

He leaned over to me with a great solemn face and said that experi- 
ence changed his whole attitude toward life. He pledged that there 
wasn’t much time left and, therefore, he would make everything 
count. One could go at any moment and so it was important to live 
under that assumption. The only other time he ever mentioned being 
in the Army was when we were considering buying a house and Carlos 
said he could qualify for the Gl Bill loan. We never applied for the 
loan, but I believed him anyway, basically because of the little things 
he did for himself, like cut his hair with a pair of scissors and a mirror. 
Except for the time when he took a hunk of hair out from the back of 
his head by accident and hid the spot with a band aid, Carlos exhib 
ited great skill in cutting his own hair. He also could patch and hem 
his own clothes. 1 had seen him add months of wear to shirts by turn- 
ing frayed collars inside out and then sewing them back on. Whether 
these were skills he’d learned in the Army or with a pack of gypsies in 
Italy, the story changed. The Defense Department has no record of 
Carlos Arana Castaneda's service. 

Actually, he spent much of his time after arriving in the country 
kicking around California, working odd jobs, perfecting his English and 
trying to save enough money to get into college. During this period, he 
wrote home sporadically. Lucia still has his letters, which indicate he 
served in the Army, but left after suffering a slight wound or “nervous 
shock" — she’s not sure which. 




50 / A Magical [ournty with Carlos Castaneda 


As always, his stories seemed to give him a more impressive back- 
ground. It was like an insecure young man searching for a respectable 
identity, who in the process suffered a gradual elimination of his past. 

Everything wasn't untrue, of course. Carlos described to me his love 
for his mother, his desire to become a sculptor, his ambivalent nature — 
all true and accurate. And yet, there were also stories, such as his Army- 
days. As Carlos talked about these, he gradually found himself in a 
remarkable state of ease. He had essentially erased himself; he had cre- 
ated a fog around the details of his past where nobody could ever be 
sure. He was like an author, conceiving of the elements of a fictional 
character, who was himself in disguise. 




8 


Sitting over cups of Chinese tea one evening in September 1957, 1 began 
to proselytize on behalf of Neville. Earlier that week, during his regular 
Thursday night lecture at the Wilshire hbell Theatre, Neville had dis- 
cussed the / AM. It was one of his pet ideas, drawn from the Biblical ref- 
erence for man's essential nature, although its origin probably was in 
the Babylonian water cults or even before in the primitive dreams of 
Neanderthals. To Neville it was a fundamental idea, pure and correct, a 
product of the basic brainstem! The I AM! (God in Man). 

“It's like the Christian soul," I was saying to Carlos. “Like the 
Hindu Atman. It’s sort of like the nameless presence within every- 
body." Then 1 turned straight to Neville, memorized from one of his 
many books, which the mystic was turning out at his own printing 
house on South La Brea Avenue. “When you understand Carlos, 
you’re neither rich nor poor, strong nor weak, neither Greek nor lew, 
bond nor free, male nor female. All these conceptions limit man. 
They hold him in captivity.” 

Carlos was polite, saying he understood, thinking it was all very inter- 
esting. And it whs sort of interesting. To Carlas this / AM business was 
really something he’d felt all along. It was tantamount to saying that the 
past was more than just a scries of years and places and arbitrary designa- 
tions, more than a collection of social constructs, limits, bonds, bound- 
aries — cerebral impedimenta. Some of the things Neville was saying 

51 



52 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


Carlos had believed for years. He still had the copy of The Search I had 
given him the second time we'd met. Skimming through it, he'd found lit- 
tle beyond the incomprehensible jargon of the philosopher. But I could 
make sense- of it. I had the ability to draw from all the books those few 
passages that really meant something to him, those special phrases that 
triggered the flags. Gradually, Carlos began to develop a mild interest in 
mysticism and rogue philosophy and psychic phenomena. 

Still, he had this uncomfortable feeling about people such as 
Neville, who appeared to be just another of those eccentric philoso- 
pher-mystics from I.aguna Beach or some such place. He wondered 
about the homemade books and the expensive lectures and Neville’s 
own weekly TV show. But the bookstores around the beat districts 
and the universities were stocking his books right along with the ).B. 
Rhine studies in parapsychology. By 1957, Rhine was on the skids. He 
had been the darling of the occult back in the 1930s, but two decades 
of criticism from conventional laboratory types and journalists like 
H.L. Mencken had decimated his Society for Psychical Research and 
had reduced his work at Duke University to little more than a parody 
of itself. But even if Rhine wasn’t doing well in the mid 1950s, there 
were others who were doing just fine. There was a renewed interest in 
the occult across the country, a sort of paranormal revival which by 
1957 was rolling full -bore with ESP, flying saucers, and American 
International sci-fi John Agar movies. After I talked about the I AM. 
and the magazines about clusters of UFOs over Kansas, and all the rest 
of it, Carlos decided to test the psychic waters himself. 

He made a deck of ESP cards with five symbols: a circle, a square, an 
addition sign, a star and a flowing wave. For months, we tested the hid 
den side of each other’s perception. The living room coffee table at my 
apartment was the logical place to do all this, basically because it was 
private. Carlos was a bit embarrassed by the ESP card testing and he 
rarely included anyone else in his experiments. There were variations to 
the testing, but generally Carlos would place the cards face down in 




53 / Beginnings 


front of him and then direct me to visualize each symbol in turn. I 
would guess and he w ould write down my answers on a yellow legal pad 
and then check my score. We would switch roles sometimes, with me 
being the tester and Carlos the subject. 

From the beginning, Carlos attempted to give it an academic impri- 
matur by compiling thick notebooks of statistics and notes, much as 
Rhine had done. It was all very scientific, very respectable in an off-beat 
sort of-way. He wanted to keep it that way, even though he had mixed 
feelings about the limits of conventional scientific techniques and 
record keeping in such experiments. On the one hand, he felt it neces- 
sary to remain somehow respectable, even if the general subject of ESP 
was still considered by academicians to be nutball stuff. Yet on the other 
hand, new ideas too often had been opposed in the beginning by the 
Philistines. After all, hadn’t they looked down their long fine-boned 
noses at Galileo, all those stout burghers of conventional thought? It 
wasn’t as if Carlos were some kind of unhinged flying saucer cultist or 
anything, he just wanted to test the outer perimeters a bit. So he spent 
months with me and the ESP cards, attempting to find out if it really 
was true, that there was another perspective. But the only thing he 
found out from all the testing and statistical data and the Chi-square 
analysis, all of it, was that if someone had the gift of ESP, it certainly 
wasn’t Carlos or me. 

The two of us began spending a great deal of time together, although 
I suspected he was dating other girls as well. Although not handsome in 
any classical sense, Carlos was exceptionally charming, especially with 
women. He would listen intently as they talked, seemingly interested in 
anything they had to say. He had developed a charming patter and a dis 
armingly personable style. If he was reserved in large groups, he was the 
opposite in private. Back at his apartment, he would sometimes talk at 
length in his strong Hispanic accent about his sculpture, or about the 
occult or whatever I wanted to talk about. We went to the movies, to art 
exhibits and we visited friends; sometimes Carlos and 1 went down to 




S4 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


the Albatross at the beach or Hie Point or a couple of places in 
Hollywood where the poets read. 

Following a movie one night Carlos and 1 decided to stop at Piece O’ 
Pizza near the LACC campus for something to eat. He mentioned that a 
girl in one of his classes had begun to follow him around. She was tall 
and blonde, a writer of sorts, whom he hardly knew. For some reason, 
she wanted to give him a Christmas present. I urged him not to take 
anything from her and he agreed. 1 was still jealous, which is exactly 
why he had made up the story, and for a while I thought seriously about 
walking to one of his classes just to get a look at this mysterious blonde, 
whom Carlos had described in some detail as having copper colored 
eyes and shoulder-length hair and a cap on her front tooth. Somebody 
like that wouldn't be hard to find and Carlos knew it. He later told me 
the girl had dropped out of class and had gone off to the mountains or 
someplace. She had been created and dissolved, an ephemeral lady, and 
1 was left wondering at a safe distance. 

Carlos assured me that his school friend had been a real person, a 
real flesh-and-blood person. And a few weeks later, driving along 
Hollywood Boulevard in his blue and white 1954 Chevy, Carlos sud 
denly turned and pointed vaguely toward the sidewalk. 

“There," he stabbed his finger in the air. “That’s the girl 1 told you 
about! That's the girl who tried to give me the gift.” 

“Where? Where is she?” I whirled around in the seat. There were 
dozens of people downtown, dozens of young blonde bubs. “1 don’t see 
her, which one? I don't see her at all." I wanted to circle around and take 
another look, but Carlos would have none of it. There was a long 
silence, which I finally broke by asking the girl’s name. 

Carlos thought for a moment. “Sue,” he said. “Sue Childress.” 

I commented that Childress was my mother's maiden name, which 
Carlos already knew, and 1 said maybe we were related somehow. Carlos 
smiled and nodded and kept driving along the boulevard under the 
drowsy California palms and neither of us said anything for a long time. 




55 I Beginnings 


It was March 1 957 before I thought any more about it. I was at work 
at Pacific Bell in the audio-visual department and for some reason the 
whole Sue Childress episode came flowing back to me. I looked at all 
the telephone directories in the city and began searching for this elusive 
Sue Childress. Finally, in the last book 1 checked there she was... a Sue 
Childress. I called a number every hour for the remainder of the day. 
Finally, at 9:30 P.M. that night, somebody named Sue Childress 
answered the phone. 

"I was at this party recently,” I said, "and I met a young man from 
South America, a writer. He told me about a girl he'd met named Sue 
Childress...” I went on for a while about the party and how my 
mother's maiden name was Childress and so forth. 

Sue was clearly bewildered. She said she didn't know anyone from 
South America and certainly hadn’t attended classes in December at 
LACC and she didn't know anything about a Brazilian writer at a party 
of whatever it was that I was saying. But she was blonde and she was a 
writer and that was confirmation enough for me, who later that night 
confronted Carlos with my discovery. 

Carlos was amused by all this and poured a glass of Mateus as he lis 
tened to my story. This whole thing had jerked me into a mean frame of 
mind and so Carlos finally was moved to assuage my jealousy. 

“Oh, you know, there’s no Sue Childress,” he said. “You know 1 just 
made the name up.” He stared at me with those black gleeful Carlos eyes 
and explained that Sue was his mother’s name and Childress was my 
mother’s name, and it was from those that he chose a fake name for an 
imaginary lady. "I had made it all up,” he said. “It was a hoax; surely you 
can understand that.” 

But I resolutely held on to my discovery, saying that the two of us had 
agreed to meet for lunch the following day. 

He blinked a moment, and gave me one of his quizzical looks and 
then he grinned and the laugh lines broke around his eyes. “You really 
are something. You’ve created Sue Childress out of your mind. Now 




56 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


someday you're going to realize what you’ve done and you'll find it was 
really magnificent." 

I wasn’t so sure it was all that magnificent. All I had done was to open 
a telephone book and find her name. It didn't seem all that Olympian 
and for the first time, I began to think maybe it had been an accident, a 
coincidence. Maybe he was telling the truth after all. 

I mumbled something about that, but Carlos wasn't listening. He was 
standing in the center of the room with his arms and legs very stiff, the 
way he'd get when he was very excited. He rolled his eyes closed and for 
one instant, he understood. I had created Sue Childress, or more accu- 
rately, I had arranged events so radically as to allow her to be brought 
into our life. And 1 had done the whole thing with that damned persist- 
ence of mine, that steel-spined determination to will things into being. 
Carlos knew he had made up the whole Sue Childress matter, but I 
couldn't be sure, and that doubt had permitted me take a vague pastiche 
of description and detail and virtually create this woman. To Carlos, it 
made perfect sense. He dreamt up a character, told me, and I in turn 
handed back to him a real human being. Of course, this was Carlos's 
own strange logic operating here and I didn't understand it. 

Carlos wanted to believe — totally, and completely believe, that he 
had a real find here, an honest-to-mindstem J.R. Rhine phenomenon. 
This was neither staged nor a matter of chance. This was no coinci- 
dence. This was a great occult stew and I seemed to have a handle on it. 
It was not Sue Childress that so impressed Carlos, but me and my iron 
will, my persistence. 

He sat down on the couch and picked up a pad and began sketching 
a portrait of Sue Childress. 

“She's not too short, about 5’7". She's blonde, but has these dark eyes 
and this lovely face, see?” He turned his sketch toward me, showing his 
black and white conception of what she'd look like. 

Looking at Sue Childress seated in the half-light of a restaurant near 
Pacific Bell’s downtown L.A. office, 1 was dumbfounded. She looked very 




57 / Beginnings 


much like Carlos's description and his sketch. But Sue denied knowing 
anybody from South America and, saying she once had taken a poetry 
course at 1.ACC, now worked for Jansen modeling bathing suits. 

I told her everything. The story, my search through the telephone 
books, Carlos' denial, the sketch, everything. Sue shook her head and 
grinned tolerantly ... and there it was! Capped incisor! Her front left 
tooth was capped, just like Carlos had said! 

When Carlos met her a couple of days later, he swore to me that it 
was the first time. He seemed genuinely baffled about the whole affair, 
especially about how closely this woman resembled his creation. I had 
the definite feeling that they knew each other, but I was never able to 
prove it. 

“Someday," Carlos wrote me, “you will understand what you've 
done here. It’s beyond your comprehension now, but someday 
you'll understand." 

The important thing was not that something inexplicable actually 
had occurred, but only that Carlos believed it had. Or maybe, it was just 
that Carlos wanted everybody to get that impression. I wasn't sure. The 
only thing for certain was that Carlos insisted on imposing a rather 
mysterious definition to a situation that may, or may not have been, all 
that mysterious. 

In retrospect, fifteen years after Sue and Carlos and 1 sat in that 
apartment and discussed the episode, Sue Childress, now Sue Parrott, 
says she’s still not sure how 1 did it. Carlos's idea was that I was a strong 
woman, able to rearrange the order of things if I so desired; and in this 
case, I was determined to find a Sue Childress who fit the bill. But Sue 
wasn’t so sure. It was Carlos, after all, who came up with the name in the 
beginning and Carlos who alone described her. It is possible that he had 
seen her on that tiny LACC campus in 1956, when she was attending 
that poetry class. It's even possible that she attended his class, although 
she doesn't remember him and doesn't think so. There are several 




58 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


explanations, only one of which is totally wacked-out, which is the one 
Carlos embraced. 

But Carlos had a knack for making normal, logical situations seem 
somehow deep and mysterious, like the night a year later, when he 
called my apartment and Sue was there and answered the phone. 

“Susie, your mother, she is having throat trouble,” he said. “She is 
going to have serious trouble." 

Obviously, he wanted her to think he was prescient, which he wasn’t. 
But it was enough to scare her anyway. 

“He led me to think that my mother was going to die and at a sub- 
liminal level it scared me," Sue recalls. “My mother has a kind of rattly 
throat. She’s a sneak smoker, and it took a moment before I saw that he 
was pulling this thing on me, this mysterious thing about my mother’s 
throat. My mother’s still very much alive, still sneaking smokes in the 
back room, and everybody knew my mother's phone number." 

After the initial shock, it all became very clear. 1 had Mrs. Childress’s 
telephone number and used it occasionally. Carlos had it too, and must 
have accidentally called the number, talked briefly with Sue’s mother 
and, hearing the woman’s normally rattly throat, decided to call Sue 
with his ominous prediction. And he knew right where to call and get 
her — my apartment. 

It was almost as if he was trying to impress the girls with his psychic 
potential or something. Shortly after the telephone incident, Sue invited 
Carlos and 1 to her mother’s for dinner. But before Mrs. Childress could 
serve the meal, Carlos disappeared. He just walked out into the back 
yard and was gone. An hour later, he turned up, acting as if nothing had 
happened. When they asked where he'd been, Carlos refused to answer 
directly and instead, tried to give the impression that there was some- 
thing strange in his disappearance. It was as if he wanted everybody to 
know that beneath that conservative demeanor a bit of magic was bub- 
bling in the corpus callosum. 




59 I Beginnings 


The single thing that contributed most to his interest in respectable 
occultism was the book. The Doors of Perception — Aldous Huxley's 
controversial mescaline experiment that became a classic shortly after 
its appearance in 1 954. Until he read I luxley, Carlos had felt there was 
something vaguely low-rent about mysticism and altered states of 
consciousness. But The Doors of Perception was important in shaping 
his new view of things, especially the way he interpreted the Sue 
Childress episode. There are levels of coincidence, other explanations 
to seemingly logical occurrences, and Huxley helped Carlos under- 
stand that. 

It was 1956 before Carlos got around to reading The Doors of 
Perception. The book is an eclectic mix of scholarship and respect for 
the mysterium tremendum, and on first reading Carlos was hooked. 
Here was one of the world's most distinguished writers putting down 
on paper in fine scholarly fashion his thoughts while under the influ- 
ence of some little known drug. Huxley wasn’t some lunatic visionary 
or pseudoguru, but an intelligent gentleman who had come upon a 
unique world-view as a product of his intoxications. Here was a man 
who was everything Carlos wanted to be urbane, literate, intelligent, 
respected, a creative man and excellent writer, an artist of rare quality. 
Huxley had the security and prestige of being an educated man, a man 
of knowledge, in the traditional sense. There was no low-rent feel about 
his work with drugs and altered perception. Huxley remained aloof, 
untrammeled, untainted by the rabble. 

In Carlos’s mind, Huxley had escaped the trap of academia, that 
ghastly nightmare where professors hop buses to class, make the rounds 
of faculty parties in pipe and hopsack tweed with satisfied Shelly visage, 
and where the conversation is academic and boring. Huxley had 
escaped it. In the mid-1950s, he had leaped feet first into drug use, reli- 
gion, superstition and pure primitive magic, and he emerged victori- 
ous. He had his detractors, to be sure, but the fact was that his 




M) I A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


experiment and eloquent discussion of it was light years beyond the 
campus hacks. 

It was almost as if he were two different persons. On one level, here 
was Huxley in his grey suit entertaining scholarly workshops and teach- 
ing in conventional classrooms and speaking at commencement exer- 
cises; on the other level you had Huxley, the enigmatic master of the 
raised consciousness. 

It wasn’t unusual to find him at commencement, those awful 
mediocre gymnasium rites. Rows and rows of business majors, biology 
students and parents fanned themselves with graduation programs, and 
there, down front, standing at the podium in splendid pontification, 
gazing out over the queues of jocks and secondary education majors 
was... Huxley, who was not one of them at all. Huxley, whom Carlos saw 
as a man living in two worlds, which is exactly what he wanted. 

Carlos perceived that Huxley understood. Huxley would have under- 
stood the old curandems and the creation of Sue Childress. Bone-deep 
he knew there were no boundaries, no biological imperatives; there was 
no coincidence, no chance, only the unbridled subjective, the ntys- 
terium tremeiulum. 





Huxley began The Doors of Perception with a brief overview of ihe 
sporadic history of mescaline research. Lewis Lewin, the German 
pharmacologist, published in 1886 the first systematic study of a 
strange cactus which eventually would be named Lophophora william- 
si i. It was just one of the mescaline cacti which for thousands of years 
had brought on the spirits for the Indians of Mexico, the American 
Southwest and South America. Utter, Havelock Hilts and Weir Mitchell 
began their experiments with mescaline itself. It was all very prim and 
scientific until Huxley came along. Huxley ignored the old laboratory 
and control group-placebo-bar graph approach. He just took a 
spoonful and sank back into his hip joints and suddenly the flowers 
were glowing like rubies and green jade. And the folded cloth — yes! — 
long folded trouser bottoms and velvet drapes, lying in still silent 
waves of great new importance. Ordinary objects he had taken for 
granted during the day-to-day suddenly loomed up and showed 
themselves from new perspectives. Suddenly, he was seeing much the 
way great artists must have seen — Van Gogh, the great Blake. This, he 
thought, is the way one ought to see. 

The old gentleman was actually saying that mescaline was good for 
you, or at least beneficial in its role of stretching the parameters of con- 
sciousness. Huxley’s thesis was that this great phenomenological 
firestorm is constantly raging around us, but that it goes largely 


61 


62 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


ignored because the brain, nervous system and sense organs are largely 
eliminative, not productive, in function. They screen out all those 
stimuli not immediately usable. Only the utilitarian stuff gets through, 
those perceptions directly related to cooking dinner, driving a car, 
dealing in the classroom or whatever. The brain and nervous system 
are primarily occupied with protecting us from being overwhelmed 
and confused by the firestorm, most of which is useless and irrelevant 
knowledge. But mescaline jerked away the screen and Huxley was say- 
ing he got a look at it all. But of course! Carlos couldn’t have agreed 
more. It was the old Mind at large he was talking about, the Clear 
Light, the myslerium tremendum. 

Henri Bergson had talked long before about the theoretical spot in 
time and space where everybody is capable of perceiving everything 
that is happening everywhere in the universe. Henri knew how the 
senses limit perception and shield the brain from all irrelevant material. 
There was the matter, however, of trying to prove all this appealing the 
ory, always a sticky area. Maybe every thing was funneled through the 
reducing valve of the brain and nervous system, but there was no way of 
knowing for sure, at least no way short of satori hunting in clay cubicles 
way out on Naoshima Island or someplace. 

It was a problem, all right, but then Huxley happened along saying to 
hell with the Chi-square, to hell with the control groups. Here came 
Huxley, who cranked open the reducing valve and let the firestorm in. 
He just sat there in a sudden flickering mescaline explosion of stimuli 
and perception that crashed through his skull, somehow seeing things 
that nobody else could see — not totally nutsy stuff, like somebody’s 
long lost mother floating over the Ouija board or iridescent spaceships 
or that kind of thing, but a sort of attuned understanding of the world 
as it is. He was seeing the perfect geometry in the tubular legs of his den 
chairs and of picture frames. Not things out there, but real world objects 
and relationships seen with new eyes. It was the same reality, only there 
was just a little more to it that people first thought. 



63 I Beginnings 


Carlos was enthralled by the man. He decided to do a term paper on 
Huxley lor his second year English class at LACC. In December 1957, he 
asked a friend, lennie Lavere, to type the paper for him. 

"It was the first time l‘d ever read anything by Aldous Huxley and 
after that, I really got into all his writings," Jennie recalls. She is now a 
housewife in North Carolina. “ The paper dealt with the effects of taking 
the peyote plant, the hallucinations. Because back then, nothing was 
ever known about LSD, or any of the hallucinogens, so this was really 
something. Carlos was impressed that it was done with a scientific 
background, done while being observed in a scientific framework and 
not just to go out of your mind, you know?” In fact. Huxley recorded 
himself throughout the experiment and constantly was being observed 
and even questioned by colleagues. 

“Carlos put many of his own ideas in the paper. It was marvelous. 1 
typed it from his rough notes and he stood over my shoulder and 
injected new ideas and things he wanted to put in it. I later wrote a term 
paper of my own on Huxley, only it wasn't anywhere nearly as good. His 
was quite new and exciting." 

Besides the Huxley Bergson Mind at Large idea, which took up 
much of the paper, Carlos explored Huxley's ideas on symbol systems 
and language. It was Huxley's feeling that the linguistic tradition is at 
once good and bad. It facilitates communication and gives future 
generations a record of the past, but it also reduces awareness. The 
words spoken are soon taken to be the actual objects and not just the 
symbols of objects. Our perception of things is defined to a great 
extent by the way we talk and write about them, so pretty soon we 
figure that if it can't be described, then it just can't be. The world of 
shared symbols is restrictive and in order to escape the rut of conven- 
tional perception it takes something radical — religion, hypnosis, 
drugs, something like that. 

Carlos’s paper covered it all: the drugs, Mind at Large, the reducing 
valve, shared symbols, the mysterium tremendum, the whole Huxley 




M I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


message. Some of it became Carlos's own message and the message of 
Don |uan, which was much the same. By 1973, Carlos was saying 
things like: 

“Gazing off at the cosmos like the mystics do is like beating a dead 
horse. There’s so much to this marvelous world right in front of us, but 
we don’t perceive it, because our reason screens out so much. Of course, 
I came from 'out there,’ and I'll return. Meanwhile, I’m on a stupendous 
loop, a journey of power — life. My body is all I have. It is an exquisite 
instrument of awareness. I must make excellent use of it.” 

This wasn't the straight Huxley line, of course. Years and experience 
had tempered him. Carlos had many of his ow n ideas and, by the 1970s, 
was borrowing from scholars like Talcott Parsons. It was Parsons who 
first used the term “glosses" to mean units of perception. As a graduate 
student, Carlos read his share of Parsons. 

“All parts of ’building' have to be present before we say it is a build- 
ing," Carlos told a reporter. “It may be impossible to determine the 
parts of a building, and yet we all know and agree about what a build- 
ing is, because we've learned to gloss 'building.' We learn to gloss very 
soon after we’re born. It’s not bound up with language at all. The only 
beings who do not have glosses are autistic children; glosses are based 
on agreement, and autistic children don’t make agreements with the 
world. Due to some physiological difference, they’re not members — 
membership occurs when everyone agrees on a certain description of 
the world. Of that building. But there’s more to that building than 
you think." 

During his early years at I.ACC, Carlos didn't make very many 
friends. It was not that he was misanthropic, but there was a small 
clique he liked to stay with. By the fall of 1956, he and I had become 
quite close and were spending much of our free time together. During 
the day I was working at Pacific Bell and he was going to school. At 
night, I would go to his apartment or he would visit me by sneaking up 
the back stairs of my apartment on West 8th Street, the large apartment 




65 I Beginnings 


building owned by my aunt Velma. Velma didn't particularly like 
Carlos, which was why he had to sneak in to see me at night. Velma saw 
Carlos as a dark foreigner from South America and admonished me to 
stay away from him. 

“Occasionally he had unhappy feelings about himself,” )enny 
recalls. “He felt rather negated from the outlook of the family which, 
well, let's just say there were certain aunts who couldn’t understand 
that which wasn’t Protestant. Republican or American. They didn’t see 
Carlos as a person; they saw him as something they couldn't under- 
stand. Carlos felt very badly about it but I don’t think he still feels 
their attitudes are important.” 

It was the first full-blown example of racism he’d run up against in 
America. It came at a time when he was unsure about his ability as an 
artist, self-conscious about his height and accent, and unsure about his 
future. The racism of Velma and to a lesser extent of another aunt who 
lived there. Alta, disturbed him deeply. Thoughts of those two lean- 
jawed harpies plagued him, especially at night when he tried to study. 
Sometimes he’d fall into dramatic states of melancholia and self-pity. 
Friends remember he didn’t laugh or smile very much and periods in 
which he examined himself intensely. 

Carlos knew at a gut level that his artwork probably wouldn’t make 
him well known, but that was something he didn't want to believe. He 
continued to paint and sculpt. And he encouraged me to make the most 
of myself. Carlos often reminded me not to spend my time foolishly, 
that time was short. He’d recall the time he almost died, when he lay on 
that aluminum military bed and vowed that he would be a different 
person ... that existential moment. He’d been given the opportunity to 
live in this world and, by God, he was going to make every minute 
count. In his mind I was a “sensitive" of sorts and should make the most 
of it. Even his casual conversation among friends had turned didactic in 
the late 1950s. He was always spreading the lesson, which was to live 




bt> I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


nobly for today."Life is short; make every minute count.” It was a lesson 
that he carried with him. 

“Don’t lose your marbles over trifles,” he admonished me in a letter 
in April 1967. “Life is but a second long." 

In January 1958, he persuaded me to better myself by enrolling 
part-time at LACC. 1 protested, saying the addition of classes to my 
work schedule would be a real infringement on my time, but Carlos 
insisted. He wanted me to be a well-educated woman and so he liter 
ally dragged me by the arm across Vermont Street to the registrar's 
office and stood there, as I signed up for a class, elementary Russian. 
The following semester, he accompanied me again when I expanded 
my curriculum to nine hours of class credit with English, Russian 
History and World Religions. 

Carlos liked the idea of my taking Russian. He had developed a fan- 
tasy that some day I would meet Soviet Premier Nikita Khnischchcv, 
who had just taken power in Moscow. Khrushchev was a powerful and 
influential figure in his eyes, a great determined bear of a leader who had 
come up from the bottom to grab the reins of one of the most powerful 
countries in the world. More than that, Khrushchev had a distinctive 
style. It was his sense of power and determination that intrigued Carlos 
above all else. At the first of the week, Carlos would go to the newsstands 
and buy the new Time or Newsweek, or he’d walk to the library if he was 
short of cash, to read about the Soviet leader there. Carlos assured me 
that I had the potential to meet and talk with the great bald Nikita. For 
some reason, this fantasy was important to him, and he mentioned it 
often. It was as if he wanted to live vicariously through the experience 
and gain some insight into the strong willed spirit of a bold and deter 
mined person like Khrushchev. 

Carlos’s closest friend during this period was probably Alan 
Morrison, a fellow student and sometime poet who worked part-time 
at the post office. There were only a few people Carlos felt comfortable 
with, specifically Alan and a Costa Rican named Byron Deford, a fellow 




67 I Beginnings 


pre-psychology student at LACC. They would come over to Carlos's 
apartment on North New Hampshire Street along with me and maybe a 
couple of my friends like Sue, and they’d all eat and drink wine and talk 
into the early morning. There was always plenty of wine, often Mateus, 
but rarely hard liquor and never any drugs. Everybody bounced ideas 
off everybody else. Carlos was into Huxley and his idea of living nobly 
for the moment. I talked about Neville. Byron liked psychic phenom- 
ena, mysticism and the notion of dreams as power. 

Thanksgiving 195V Carlos cooked turkey Brazilian-style, with 
sweet homemade sauce made of apples, apricots, pineapple, wine and 
tomatoes. He served it with side plates of pasta. Everybody ate and 
complimented Carlos on his prowess in the kitchen. As the night wore 
on, the conversation moved from movies and books to music and ESP 
and philosophy. Byron mentioned a couple of great religio-philo- 
sophical documents he'd been reading. He mentioned that Buddha 
never wrote anything, that someone else recorded all that he said and 
did. The same for Jesus Christ. The discourse of the perfect master 
from Galilee, Byron told everybody, was written down well after he’d 
said it by disciples who were probably affected by time, ancient scrip 
hire and rapidly ballooning myths. 

Everybody agreed, Carlos included. There actually was no proof that 
these philosophical man-gods really said anything remotely resembling 
the historical scriptures. It might have been the words of the chroniclers 
and not of Buddha or Jesus. 

“If l came to you," I interjected," and I told you that I’d found the 
ultimate way of life and that I could tell you exactly how to do it, it 
would be very hard for you to accept." Byron nodded. Carlos nodded. 
"But if I said to you that I’ve got a mysterious teacher who has let me in 
on some great mysteries, then it’s more interesting. I’d say I’ve gone 
through all these mysterious things with him and now have come to 
these conclusions. It’s much easier to accept." 

“Like The Razor's Edge,” said Alan. 




«i I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


"Like Siddhartha," Byron said. 

Carlos nodded again, as if thinking carefully. As usual, he said very little, 
choosing to listen and maybe ask a couple of questions. He rarely con 
tributed ideas of his own. Carlos rarely agreed or disagreed with the drift of 
the conversation, choosing instead to just sit back with a glass of Mateus. 

Byron, who always joined readily into the conversations, swung his 
wine glass and launched into some long discussion on a tangential 
issue, coming around eventually in full agreement with me. He sug 
gested that the great thinkers, truly great intellectuals whether they were 
famous or not, probably were too wrapped up in their revolutionary 
work or ideas to write it all dow n. That was left to the disciples and stu 
dents and other lessers, he said. 

Or maybe they just didn't think it was important, suggested Allen. 
Maybe they were too far above it all. 

“Maybe,” said Carlos and then he grinned, which was sort of a signal 
that he was not committing himself. He rarely committed himself in 
those gatherings, but he always appeared to listen with great interest. 
And this business of a true mystic's words coming not from the thinker 
himself, but from the student well, this was quite interesting. It 
seemed to make a big impression on him. 

“1 am sure that you and I will be again together in order to partake 
of our grand sessions of intellectual and spiritual findings," Carlos 
wrote me almost ten years later. But he may not have meant it. A few 
years after writing this letter, he told an interviewer that those 
evenings with friends at his apartment were little more than ways of 
escaping the boredom of the moment. His work in the desert was 
often strict and demanding. “I would have preferred just to sit around 
with my friends and talk about ideas. We all have so many devices for 
fighting olT boredom — being intellectual, overindulging in alcohol, 
sex, drugs, anxiety.” 




69 / Beginnings 



Carlos and I al Ma Schuster's apartment— 

I lived here with Carlos, after we married in 1960. Notice the “luminous head of 
light" In the mirror— looks like the picture ol Carlos on the book cover of A 
Separate Reality 





70 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 



Carlos s terra cotta bust of his father. 

Cesar Arana Castaneda 

In his final two years at LACC, however, “being intellectual" was a 
way of coming facc-to-facc with ideas he never found in his psychol- 
ogy, English or art classes. Even niy theatrical mystic was saying things 
he found interesting. Neville’s ideas about dreaming, for example. 
Carlos had long thought of dreaming as, well, as just dreaming — a 
hazy subliminal state of nightmares and overblown fantasies. But here 




71 / Beginnings 


was a man who was saying that one state was as real as the other. 
Dreaming and waking were both valid conditions, only the vantage 
points were different. What’s more, Neville taught that dreams have 
power and that by arranging them according to one's personal wishes 
one can alter the future. The heart of Neville's prophetic spiel was 
developing a confidence in getting what you want through intense 
dreaming and “controlled imagination.” Carlos read only a little of 
Neville’s work; he never took him seriously enough to work his way 
through all his books. It was mainly through me that he learned about 
Neville's ideas on dreaming and all the rest of it, and that was back in 
1958 over wine in his own apartment. 

The idea of "setting up dreaming," Carlos says in Journey to Ixtlan, 
came to him in August 1961. Two weeks earlier, he had eaten peyote 
buttons and, at the height of a soaring hallucination, he had played 
with a neighborhood dog. It was an enchanting experience the way 
Carlos told it. The dog became suddenly iridescent and, as both he 
and the animal drank water from a dish in a silly, giddy episode, fluid 
suddenly came flowing out their pores, giving both long, gleaming, 
iridescent manes. It was Carlos’s first hallucinogenic adventure. The 
following morning, Don luan explained that the dog was actually the 
incarnation of Mesailito, the power or deity contained in peyote. It 
was a good sign and the Indian figured that his apprentice might be 
ready for heavier stuff. Don luan explained that dreaming was real 
and that a person should think of it in those concrete terms. A strong 
individual can choose and select what he wants to be part of his 
dream. To “set up dreaming" is to manipulate those elements of a 
dream in a way that will affect day to day life. According to Don luan, 
it was all a matter of power — unity, a sense of the nature of things, 
control over one's life. This was all rather abstract, but clearly resem- 
bled Neville’s technique of altering the future as a route to money or 
success or whatever. Dreaming Don luan-style brought everything 
into focus — there were no differences between sleep and waking. 




72 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


Neville said much the same thing. Even the preliminaries were similar. 
As preparation for setting up dreaming. Carlos stared at his folded 
hands in his lap. Neville, in his lectures, instructed his students to lie 
on the bed or sit in a chair and just concentrate on what they felt was 
their ideal self, their ideal situation. Claim to be ideal, Neville prom- 
ised, and “your present world of limitations will disintegrate as your 
new claim rises like the Phoenix from its ashes." 

The techniques were the same, but so was the goal: to shake the 
apprentice out of the rut of ordinary real-world perception. Togo beyond. 

With the / AM. Neville proposed that the real individual should be 
devoid of past or future. It was the man without the cultural and social 
impediments. But the idea of erasing the personal history and recogniz- 
ing the individual without the limitations and attachments of past was 
all part of Don Juan’s early teachings. More importantly, it was some- 
thing that Carlos actually had begun doing years before meeting Don 
|uan or hearing about Neville. 

Then there was the beacon of light. One Tuesday night, I went to 
Carlos’s apartment after one of Neville's lectures at the Wilshire F.bell 
Theatre. The subject on this particular evening had been something 
called the awakened imagination. Neville said someone who possesses 
an awakened imagination is special and he sometimes appears as a bea- 
con of light, a great white glowing face. It was supposedly a real quality, 
even for a few non-Nevilleites who were extremely attuned, such as 
artists, scientists, inventors, people with vivid imagination. 

In 1958, Carlos was working on a terra cotta bust when I burst into 
the apartment and starting going on about the latest Neville spiel. He 
listened for a while. The thing that convinced me was that right in the 
session, in the middle of the convoluted dissertation, Neville’s face actu- 
ally began glowing. It was almost like a beacon in the front of the the- 
atre. All he had to do was talk about something and if happened. Carlos 
looked up from the sculpture and laughed. 




73 / Beginnings 


It was in April 1968, by Carlos's own account, that Don Juan 
explained that smoking the mixture of hallucinogenic mushrooms and 
other ingredients lifted an apprentice to the point where he could see 
men as they really are — as fibers of light. Threads circle a man from head 
to navel, creating an effect like that of a great glowing luminous egg. 

Carlos writes that after slipping into some vertiginous funk with 
Don Juan’s “little smoke," he looked up and saw his benefactor's face as 
a strange luminous object. Carlos figured it was the product of the 
drug, but Don luan said no, that in fact everybody actually looks like a 
luminous egg. All it took was a perceptive person to see it. 

In retrospect, some of Don Juan’s ideas certainly have roots in 
Neville’s Tuesday night speeches at the Wilshire Ebell Theatre, But my 
mystic was hardly the prototype. Carlos’ favorite in the late 1950s was 
not Neville or Rhine or any of the others Byron and I would talk about 
during those old “grand sessions of spiritual and intellectual findings." 
It was Huxley he admired most, the gentleman scholar who, for a fleet 
ing instant had seen as an artist sees, as Van Gogh had seen. Sometimes, 
Carlos would play with the idea of taking mescaline and then do his 
painting and sculpting. In one of his deep depressions, he’d lie back on 
the bed and stare up at the ceiling and think about how his work was 
too mediocre to get him anywhere. He just didn’t have it, the skill, the 
vision, whatever it was that successful artists have. He’d lie there with all 
the lights off and fight the reality. 

His fantasy was that somehow he’d gotten hold of a few grants of 
mescaline and had taken it and was sitting at the sink over a lump of 
clay, when suddenly, everything slipped out of focus for a moment. It 
was one of those rolling surrealistic rushes he always imagined. When 
the focus sharpened, he’d look down at the clay and there superim- 
posed on the lump was a vision of a great piece of art. It was his greatest 
achievement, a single statuette that represented both a pre-Columbian 
rugged ness and individuality, and a modern sense of motion and space. 
It was a perfect mating of period and lifestyle, a bold new genre, and 




7* I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


suddenly here was the New York Times interviewing Carlos Castaneda 
about his contribution to the development of art, and he appeared on 
the cover of the journals and the trade publications and even Time 
magazine, which devoted six full-color pages to his vision of the new 
Hispanicism or whatever it was. He was suddenly the darling of the gal- 
leries and the dealers, and his timeless Chimu knockoffs were on display 
everywhere in I os Angeles and New York and Paris. The father of 
Primitive Modernism... 

Then some crazy greaseball would squeal down North New 
Hampshire in his 1948 Ford and the dogs out back would start yelping 
for no apparent reason. Carlos would squint up at the ceiling and some 
times the dapple patterns on the plaster would change, depending on the 
light from the window. Sometimes they’d roll for hours up there, float- 
ing around like oil on water, shadows doing a mad hypnotic gavotte, just 
floating, just rolling up there, the slow rhiznpodous tide. He’d watch that 
for awhile and then he’d get up to go outside and walk around. 





(Carlos stared through the yellow dusk. His hands Hashed on the sun- 
light slanting in through the Venetian blinds. The curtains were drawn 
against the bright December L.A. sun, but the light still streamed in and 
Carlos' hands flashed away as he shaped a tan lump of clay into a bust of 
Sue Childress. He worked quickly and with a sort of inner serenity and 
confidence, pulling the clay into a nose, shaping a pony tail, poking his 
thumbs into the eyesockets of the bust, using his sculptor’s tools for 
refinements. 

Sue wasn't actually wearing a pony tail on this particular afternoon. 
But Carlos thought it was appropriate, because he had seen her wear it 
often enough. In fact, it seemed de rigimir for the Sue Childress he 
wanted to capture, the Sue Childress who was always heading for Venice 
or Muscle Beach or some of the decadent dives farther south. She had 
begun to write poetry with a friend who sometimes read from a lighted 
stage down in Venice. Sue would dress up in her pony tail and wooden 
shoes and jeans and sit there in the gloom beating a bongo or some- 
thing. Carlos didn't care very much for the beatniks, who he felt were 
largely untalented and self-indulgent. But he went with me to some of 
the coffee houses on Hollywood Boulevard and he enjoyed listening to 
some of the poets, just a year before, Allen Ginsberg had delivered the 
legendary reading down at Venice that Lawrence Lipton later described 
in his book, The Holy Harbarians. Ginsberg dropped by the spots along 


75 




76 / A Mdgic.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


with lack Kerouac and some of the others who were all part of the 
unfolding bohemian history. 

But Carlos didn’t care very much about that. He didn't care for their 
devotion to laissez-faire, their pornographic verse, their cliques, and he 
wasn’t impressed with their sloppy appearance. He abhorred rolled 
jeans and stained cableknits, especially those navy blue jobs all the 
painters were wearing. Carlos wore to the coffee houses exactly what he 
wore to the library and the laundromat — a pastel Don Loper shirt with 
dark slacks and black very plain shoes, all neatly pressed and polished 
and coordinated and respectable. He was an outsider, a curious inter- 
loper in beatland, and he wanted it that way. 

He wrote poetry himself, though not the kind he was hearing in 
Hollywood and along the beach. It was more an imitation of the past 
masters he’d studied. Cesar Vallejo, for example. Sometimes he included 
poems in his letters home. Perhaps his favorite was Pichos de l.uz y 
Amor by San Juan de la Cruz, a haunting metaphorical verse, which he 
included at the beginning of Tales of Power: 

The conditions of a solitary bird are five: 

The first, that it flies to the highest point; 

the second, that it does not suffer for company, 

not even of its own kind; 

the third, that it aims its beak to the skies; 

the fourth, that it does not have a definite color; 

the fifth, that it sings very softly. 

Classes and part-time jobs infringed on Carlos’s time, but he still 
managed to turn out a number of sculptures in the late 1950s. 1 got a 
few of his pieces, only one of which I still have. It is a roughly hewn bust 
of a man with a slender nose, empty stare and ruggedly carbuncular 
look. Besides the bust of Sue, there’s one of l.vdette he turned out, with 
her long hair falling down on each side and forming at the base. Usually 




77 I Beginnings 


he worked in terra cotta, obviously of the Chicama school which he 
studied at the Fine Arts Institute. Generally, it was a style devoid of var- 
nish, which gave the sculpture a natural tone and human look. Around 
the Chicama Valley that’s the style you'd see everywhere, with fired clay 
statuettes and vases, or as relief ornamentation on buildings. Carlos 
also worked with soapstone, and on one occasion, he worked for hours 
on a full-figured nude of a pregnant woman kneeling, hands on her 
chin and long hair flowing back. It was a delicate six inches high, almost 
iridescently pink and grey with slender streaks of black running 
through it. 

loan .VlcFadden, who is now loan Daugherty and a housewife living 
in Arlita, California, remembers that when she met Carlos in 1 963, some 
of the old Castaneda art was still circulating among friends. Slowly, as he 
lost confidence in his ability as an artist, he stopped painting and then 
sculpting. But there was still that earnestness about him, that drive to be 
accepted and recognized as an accomplished, creative person. And so his 
conversations often were geared in the abstract. 

“When you were with Carlos," says Jenny Vucinich, “you always had 
to talk about things that were deeply meaningful. It was always some 
thing that he felt very deeply about. You just couldn't help from being 
excited when you were talking with him, because he wasn’t the type of 
person who talked about the weather or things that would make you 
feel depressed or down. Not people or things. We talked al>out ideas and 
how to be more alive and what life was. He did speak of his father and 
mother and how they put him on this earth and left him by himself." 

If his fabled aloneness was an obstacle, he could turn it into an 
instructive little story; his problem with Aunt Velma was not so easily 
transformed. She did not like him. It was simply a matter of racism and 
there wasn’t much t jrlos could do about it. The bottom line was not 
that Carlos was strong and resourceful, which was the message in his 
story about being put on the earth and left alone, but that he was some- 
how inferior, at least by Alta's standards. It was something he couldn’t 




78 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


overcome, short of bleaching his face and adopting a mid western 
accent. "He had this little problem about feeling important," says Jennie. 
“I think because of his mother dying at such an early age and having 
been raised by people who weren't perhaps sympathetic to him, it must 
have been very traumatic for him to find another lady who gave him a 
hard time.” 

If her version of his past was a product of Carlos's careful fitting of 
fact with myth even as early as 1957, her conclusion was very close to 
the mark. His antagonists were often women; his predicaments, real or 
imagined, were often the result of something a woman had done. 
Interestingly, he writes in his books about la Catalina, a sorceress, a 
woman of enormous power who becomes the only physical opponent 
he faces throughout his years as an apprentice. There are powers, to be 
sure, and plenty of abstract confrontations with abstract forces, but 
only when In Catalina appears does Carlos come face-to-face with a 
human opponent of such frightening proportion. 

Though Carlos was preaching independence and freedom, he was 
nevertheless becoming increasingly possessive of me. One evening 
when Carlos was getting ready to take me to class, the telephone rang. It 
was Dr. Teja Gerth, a physician I had met a few months earlier. I had 
warned him about Carlos and so when a man answered, Gerth pre- 
tended he had called the wrong number. 

"Is Mrs. Goldabourge there?" he asked. 

Carlos didn’t buy it. “Listen you SOB, I know who you are. You’re 
Gerth and I'm taking Margaret to school and I don't want you ever to 
call here again!" Carlos slammed down the receiver and grumbled all 
the way to campus. 

Once we got to UCLA, where I was enrolled in a night class I ducked 
down a hall and called Gerth from a pay phone. I explained what had 
happened and was standing there laughing about it when 1 turned 
around and there, scowling through the glass, was Carlos Castaneda. 




79 I Beginnings 


In 1958, 1 was attending a class at Pacific Telephone in Management 
Conversational Skills. I rode the bus from the Wilshire area to down- 
town Olive Street in Los Angeles. One evening when 1 waited for the 
bus, I saw an East Indian dressed in a black suit, very British-looking 
and carrying an umbrella. He sat alone on the bus and so did I. 

The next morning as 1 was going to work, 1 thought how interesting 
it would be for me to have a discussion with him and write it up for 
my class. 

That evening I came out, of course looking for him; he was nowhere 
around. I felt rather disappointed and started to hurry to get the bus. 
Suddenly, right behind me, I heard this voice with an Indian English 
accent and he said to me, “You really have to hurry to get this bus." Well, 
to say the least, 1 was delighted to see him. 1 entered the bus first; then 
he came aboard and sat beside me. I couldn’t believe my good luck, He 
never sat by anyone before. I wondered why he chose to sit beside me 
this particular day. 

After the bus started and we were well on the way, I started the con- 
versation and found that he was from Bombay, India. His name was 
Suran Bhat. He was with Boeing Aircraft. He had a Ph.D. from Bombay, 
India and a Ph.D. from Purdue University. Very impressive, I thought. 
In our conversation 1 found that he was an astrologist and could actu- 
ally cast a horoscope. He asked my birthday and time of day I was born 
and said he would work my chart and let me know what he found. He 
said he had used his astrological chart and played the stock market in 
India and had done very well financially. 

He was married, had no children and had been in the United States 
about six months. 

I wrote my discussion on an “1 said, "“He said" basis and it turned out 
very well. In fact, 1 had a wonderful response from the class and my 
instructor was very impressed with my originality and unique approach. 




SO I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


A few days later, Bhat got on the bus. As we were riding along, he 
reached inside his suit coat and took out the horoscope, which he 
had promised. 

I k said during the discussion that 1 would many someone who would 
become famous... definitely for something I would write about. It would 
be philosophical in nature, but written clearly for everyone to understand. 

I was so impressed with his astrological ability. Not only to cast a 
horoscope, but to interpret what the stars in different positions meant. 1 
asked if he would teach me to cast a horoscope. He agreed to do so. 

I lived in one of my aunt's apartments on West 8th Street in l.os 
Angeles and he had made about two visits to help me set up a horo 
scope. I was learning very quickly because I was very interested in 
astrology and its effect on our lives from day to day. 

I heard a knock at the door. When 1 opened the door, there stood 
Carlos, all dressed up. He had a suit, white shirt and dark tie on. He said 
he’d like to meet my friend. 

I asked him to come in. He sat down in a chair in the corner of the 
living room. The Indian was sitting on the couch. 

I left the room to pour some wine for us. When 1 returned, Suran, the 
Indian, was asking Carlos if he was interested in astrology. Carlos said 
very solemnly, “No, I am not interested in astrology, I am only inter- 
ested in Missa Runyan. I feel your ideas are most intelligent and I think 
she is most intelligent. To me, that is a very dangerous combination, so 
I suggest you leave immediately." Of course I heard all of this, and really 
didn't know what to do. The Indian just sat there and said nothing, but 
finally did go. 

I said to Carlos that he shouldn't have come and put me on the spot 
with that very dignified Indian man. He was, after all, there at my invi- 
tation and we were working on drawing up a chart for a horoscope. 

Carlos said, “Ah, Missa Runyan, you are dangerous when you get 
with an intelligent man. I don’t know what might have happened if I 
hadn't shown up." 



81 I Beginnings 


Well, that was the last I saw of the Indian. I didn't even get a copy of 
my horoscope he had done. 





Carlos remained at his place on North New Hampshire through most of 
1958. He got a job at the Mattel Toy Company plant on Rosencrans 
Avenue at Hawthorne a few miles away. He drove the distance in an old 
Chevrolet which he’d bought. The place on North New Hampshire was 
a pink stucco apartment building with a tile roof and miniature bal- 
conies — sort of early Alamo. Carlos lived in apartment No. 4, on the 
first level with a large window in front that opened out onto a street of 
modest houses and apartments. He had straw mats on the floor, long 
bookcases against the walls and a wooden desk by the window. His 
sculpting gear was set up in the corner. He had a Murphy bed and a 
couple of old stuffed chairs and the long bookcase against the far wall 
was filled with paperbacks, mostly Latin poetry or biographies. There 
was no radio or television or telephone — just a typewriter on top of the 
desk and one half-finished piece of sculpture or another in the comer. 
On Sunday afternoons when I came over, he'd set up his board across 
the kitchen sink and work with the light streaming in. 

With classes and his job at Mattel, there was less time for his art. But 
he could write anywhere — between classes, on the job, at the apart- 
ment — and he began carrying around a ringed notebook that he filled 
with poems and romantic prose. He took a class in Latin poetry to get 
acquainted with classical style and classical themes. He paid special 
attention to Lucretius. Like Huxley, Lucretius had a serious regard for 


R2 




S3 I Beginnings 


the scientific method, such as it was in the First Century, B.C. And there 
was all this noble talk of death and the pusillanimous fear of death and 
how the brave warriors of the mountainsides live always with the 
notion of death without cowing to it. Among the verses that Carlos cir- 
cled in his textbook was: 

And some will die to gain a statued name 
Sometimes the fear of death will bring a man 
lb hate the sunlight fostering his life 
Till, grieving, he will toss his life away. 

If he told some people he was from the land of Lucretius, he also said 
he was from Brazil, and made it clear to me that he was aware of the 
classics of that South American country. In the fall, he gave me one of 
his albums, Hnchiimas Rrasilemu No. 5, a Villa-I.obos suite and a collec- 
tion of Brazilian folk songs w ith five Puccini arias on the other side. The 
suite and folk songs were in Portuguese and Carlos seemed to under- 
stand the language, as would have been the case had he come from 
Brazil. Until I ‘J60, he received regular letters from home and I never 
paid any attention whether or not they were Portuguese. He'd always 
read them to me in English, so I never knew. 

By his fourth year at LACC, Carlos had moved into a boarding house 
on Adams Avenue, owned and operated by a small, wiry woman named 
lonnie, who lived on the ground floor. She fixed up steaming home- 
cooked meals and served them for her boys at a long table in the dining 
area. She was a friendly, maternal woman with strict rules about girls in 
the rooms. Most of the boarders were rather dull and abided by her dic- 
tum of “no girls allowed.’’ But Carlos didn't pay attention to that. He’d 
have me leave my apartment and sneak up the stairs after dark and 
spend the night in his room. At dawn I’d put on a pair of Carlos's socks 
so as to not make any noise while creeping down the stairs, and then out 




M I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


across the lawn along Adams Avenue with Carlos watching out the win 
daw upstairs. 

He'd write about little romantic encounters, short stories about per 
sonal relationships, but he never wanted me to read them. He tried to 
keep his notebook to himself. At LACC, one teacher who encouraged 
him to continue writing was Vernon King, Carlos’s creative writing 
instructor. Under King's tutelage. Carlos was writing more than ever, 
especially poetry. One of his poems won first place in writing contest 
sponsored by The Collegian, the school newspaper. The winning entry 
appeared in an issue of the paper complete with the adopted name of its 
author, Carlos Castaneda. 

In December 1 958, Carlos decided to rent a small house on Cherokee 
Avenue in Hollywood. I was living in an apartment on 8th Street that 
my Aunt Velma owned. She watched my activities very closely and ques- 
tioned me if I wasn't there when I was supposed to be. She disapproved 
of my dating Carlos, because he was foreign and she knew nothing 
about him. I spent most of the month with Carlos. He was always busy 
working on a sculpture, writing, etc. He made Christmas cards with 
Father Time holding an hourglass (I lost the one he gave me). We went 
to coffee houses on Hollywood Boulevard, attended cultural activities 
and a lot of movies... mostly foreign movies. 

I never missed any of Neville Goddard’s lectures at the Wilshire tbell 
Theatre. Carlos never attended any of the lectures with me. I would 
usually discuss them freely with Carlos. He would comment sometimes, 
other times not. 

Neville claimed that the Bible is not history, but each human being's 
biography. He suites that the Bible always speaks in the present tense 
and is telling us about ourselves. 

He stated that in |ohn I, “In the beginning was the Word, and the 
Word was with God and the Word was God.” It is telling us the Word is 
our thoughts, which are words, and that each of us is a God. When we 
stop worshipping God as someone outside ourselves and know that He 




*5 I Beginnings 


dwells within us and by accepting Christ as our wonderful human 
imagination, we can make anything we can imagine a reality. Thinking 
from what we want, knowing that it is already so, then resting on the 
assumption that it is so, automatically brings about the events that 
bring it into being. That is the Sabbath Day, resting from your mental 
labor. Not Sunday, resting from physical labor. 

With me, Carlos wasn't as reluctant to talk about psychic phenomena 
and sometimes he’d have me interpret in that strange, creative, mystical 
way of mine some stories he’d tell, often stories he’d read in The 
Brothers Karamazov. I read it too, and I went into great detail about the 
abstract and metaphorical aspects of the book. The brothers, I said, 
were actually aspects of one individual and the father was the physical, 
material male — while the mother was symbolic of the subconscious. I 
went on like that, all about the symbols I saw, and Carlos wrote it all 
down to use later in a paper for the class. 

We stayed on Cherokee Avenue for about a month. I returned to 
Aunt Velma’s and Carlos took a room on the second floor of the 
Marietta Apartments on Vermont Street just across from the I.ACC 
campus. The Marietta was a four story, dirty yellow brick apartment 
building with white double doors, a baroque iron light hanging out 
front beside a white pillar with gold shields over the two street-level 
windows. Oriental carpets stretched the length of the hallways inside. 

Carlos was in his last semester and the grind was beginning to wear 
on him. He took a job at a silk screening operation and began studying 
for naturalization. Carlos and I talked occasionally about which name 
he’d use, Arana or Castaneda. Arana was his legal name, but we both 
agreed that Carlos Castaneda had a certain ring to it. He’d used it on 
school records and job applications for years anyway, so we decided that 
he’d stay with Castaneda. 

When Aunt Velma died in April 1959, 1 joined Alta and other family 
members at the funeral. But Carlos stayed away. He didn't like her pre- 
tensions — her comfortable California life-style, or her stories about 




«6 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


traveling West and getting married three times and collecting real 
estate. She had spelled her name Runyon out West and she claimed that 
Damon Runyon was not only a relative, but a friend she had advised 
about writing some years before. Carlos didn't care about any of it and 
he was happy that she was dead. He felt less intimidated around me 
with Aunt Velma gone. 

Carlos finished his classes at I.ACC by spring, graduating on June 19, 
1959, with an Associate of Arts degree in pre psychology. He went 
through the standard ceremony in robe and tassel, standing for the 
graduation photo, standing stiffly, unsmiling, his hair clipped neatly 
and arms dangling and hands cupped self consciously. He sent the 
photo to his relatives back in Peru along with a letter saying he planned 
to enroll at UCLA. It was one of his last letters home. When his books 
were published, Carlos didn’t even let them know and it wasn't until the 
early 1970s that they even knew where he was. His last link with home 
was a photograph of his mother that he dramatically tore up during an 
argument with me at the apartment. 




With classes at LACC completed, Carlos applied at UCLA. Recognizing 
what had been painfully obvious all along — that he’d never make it as 
an artist — Carlos turned his attention to a teaching career. The idea of 
becoming a writer was intriguing, but still a bit improbable at this stage. 
Carlos's switch from psychology to anthropology wasn't something he'd 
done after careful consideration. He barely thought about it. It was just 
a different area of the social sciences, a discipline he felt only a little 
more inclined to teach. 

After Velma’s death, I moved to a duplex on South Detroit Street, 
which 1 furnished with pieces collected over the previous three years. 
Sue Childress, who had spent the summer working in Florida, returned 
to California and moved in with me. When he wasn't in class or work- 
ing at some odd job, Carlos was at my apartment. For about six weeks 
he taught Sue Spanish and worked with dialect. In return, she paid him 
in fresh fruit sherbets. In early winter, Carlos got a job in the billing 
department of Haggarty’s, a fine women’s shop on Wilshire Boulevard 
in Hollywood. It was evening work, checking accounts, bringing bal- 
ances into line and seeing that bills were mailed. 

There was a vague sense of tlejii vu about the whole thing. Here he 
was, standing in the delicate pink womb of Haggarty s of Hollywood, 
like being back in Peru, watching the gordilm again. Only here he was, 
standing near the baby pink wall-to-wall under a great unfolding 


87 




R8 I A M.igk.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


crystal chandelier, right at the rolling edge of America. Sometimes the 
light would slant through the windows in the late day and would crash 
off the counters and the rings and bracelets and the gold and silver 
would glitter, like the old days at Osar’s shop. Sometimes Carlos won- 
dered if he'd made a mistake coming to America, thinking maybe he’d 
have done better back in South America, where he didn't feel so much 
like an outsider. But generally he felt he'd made the right decision, 
especially during those freewheeling Saturday nights around my 
apartment where somebody would bring the Mateus wine and every- 
body would talk about philosophy, painting, extrasensory perception 
and poetry. The smaller the group, the less inhibited Carlos was and 
the more he would commit himself to really wacked out occult stuff 
like astral projection and trance running. "He’d twinkle up his eyes 
and it was almost as if he wanted me to think he had some of the 
answers I didn't have." Sue recalls. "But then, on the other hand, I 
wouldn’t doubt it.” He could turn mystic when the spirit willed. 

When everybody started talking about predicting the future, Carlos 
did some predicting of his own. He told me one night about somebody 
he hadn't seen in years, somebody he described strangely as “the miss 
ing link to this fate, determined tri-unity among the three of us," the 
three being himself, myself and Sue. He predicted that Sue would marry 
the man. I got excited and called Sue. 

“Is he a doctor?" Sue asked, apparently with visions of her own. 

“What does this fellow do?" I asked Carlos. He said the man was an 
intern, who intended to specialize in brain surgery. And, he added, the 
four of us would some day travel to Brazil. It never happened. 

But if his predictions didn’t come true, some of his ideas had a way of 
turning up later, often in his books and occasionally as lessons from 
Don Juan. The routines, for example, were enemies even before I960. 
The idea of being bored with life and with people frightened him, and 
he often worried aloud about the routines of his life, of getting up every 
morning and going to class in specifically numbered classrooms and 




89 I Beginnings 


being at work by 3 P.M. He was dying inside a structure, he felt, wasting 
away without enough time to paint and write. He told me that if he 
intended to take an eight to five job he would never carry his lunch. 
Years later, he w rote that Don Juan had admonished him to disrupt his 
routines as a way of keeping the world fresh and new and his percep- 
tions keen. 

When The Sacred Mushroom by Andrija Puharich was published, 
everybody read it, Carlos included; it became the center of conversa- 
tion around the apartment for months. Puharich's thesis was that a 
Dutch sculptor who he had met could, from a deep trance, recall 
details of Egyptian life during the IVth Dynasty and did so from the 
reference point of a man named Ra Ho Tep. Moreover, Puharich set 
out to prove that the sacred mushroom, Amanita Muscaria, could 
heighten psychic ability and awareness. There was a connection, 
Puharich figured, between the Siberian shamanistic phenomenon of 
leaving the body and the lilting intoxication of the sacred mushroom. 
That was his theory. 

The Greeks apparently had a tradition of magical detachment of psy- 
che from the body. In the first chapter, Puharich quotes from Dodd’s 
The Creeks and the Irrational, a scholarly anthropological piece pub- 
lished a few years earlier by the University of California Press. Among 
other things, it says the shaman is a psychically unstable person who has 
fallen into the religious life, albeit an unconventional one. A period of 
rigorous training gives one all the credentials of a shaman, including 
the ability of falling at will into states of mental dissociation. 

"A shaman may in fact be seen simultaneously in different places; he 
has the power of bilocation,” Dodd wrote. “From these experiences, 
narrated by him in extempore song, he derives the skill in divination, 
religious poetry and magical medicine which makes him socially 
important. He becomes the repository of supernormal wisdom." 

Through the Dutch sculptor Harry Stone, Puharich came up with 
esoteric Egyptian phrases that seemed to document the existence and 




90 / A Magical lourncv with Carlos Castaneda 


use of sacred mushrooms in ancient religious ceremonies. It was a 
most irrational proposition and Puharich went about proving it in a 
most rational manner. He collected pages of data and did hours of set 
entific testing. He transcribed 200 pages of Stone's babbling in 
Egyptian, a volume so immense that Puharich concluded he could not 
have memorized it. 

The idea of drug use among the ancients interested Carlos to be sure, 
but the thing that really pricked his psychic sensibilities and kept him 
reading was this eerie similarity between Harry Stone and himself. It 
was crazy how much alike they were. Stone was a foreigner in America, 
shy and unsure of himself, a high school graduate who had gone to an 
art academy for several years. He had been trying unsuccessfully for the 
last six or seven years to establish himself as a sculptor. Stone told 
Puharich that when he was about six years old, his aunt died, which is 
exactly what had happened to Carlos. Even if the book seemed absurd, 
Carlos found himself identifying with Harry Stone, the magical Ra Ho 
Tep personality. 

As part of the study, Puharich talked with Gordon Wasson, an expert 
in drug use among the primitive mystics, who told him about traveling 
in 1953 to Mexico to check stories about a ritualistic mushroom cult 
that had once flourished there. Wasson found not only that the cult had 
once existed, but also that some members were still working their pecu- 
liar magic in remote regions of the desert. As Wasson explained it, the 
ceremony was conducted by a curaruiero who ate mushrooms as part of 
the healing and divination process. The mushrooms were Psilocybe 
mexiamci and the active ingredient was psilocybin. 

Puharich rounded up some of his own sacred mushrooms, ran 
experiments and discovered that human beings don't exhibit any 
remarkable psychic effects after eating Amanita muscaria. Toward the 
end of the book, Puharich wheeled on somebody who suddenly 
snapped Carlos hack to attention, somebody who gave the whole occult 
affair a certain respectability — Aldous Huxley. In August 1955, Huxley 




91 I Beginnings 


had watched as Harry Stone slipped into one of his trances. During this 
segment of the experiment, Stone receded into his Ra Ho Tep personal- 
ity and insisted on having the golden mushroom brought to him. 
Puharich did. Then Stone began going through the secret ceremonial 
details of applying the mushroom to his tongue, placing it on the top of 
his head — the whole Egyptian ritual, lost forever except that Puharich 
seemed to be resurrecting it in his New England laboratory. As Stone 
came out of the trance, Puharich blindfolded him and tried a MAT test 
for clairvoyance. Huxley watched as the Ra Ho Tep counterpart com- 
pleted an entire scries of matching ten sets of pictures in a few seconds, 
a feat with odds of a million to one. With Huxley involved, at least pas 
sively, the whole book was worth at least some serious consideration. 
With Puharich, Carlos was introduced to Mexican shamanism and the 
use of Psilocybe mexicana. Huxley had introduced him to mescaline 
and, more specifically, to Professor |.S. Slotkin’s descriptions of peyote 
use by the American Indians. Slotkin's research dealt with the Native 
American Church, a group who believed peyote was God's special gift 
to the Indians. Slotkin was one of the very few white men to participate 
in the rites of peyotists, one of only a handful to be shaken out of the rut 
of ordinary perception by a plant that Carlos knew was so attainable — 
a plant that was essentially the same as his native San Pedro... the holy 
Mother Cactus. 

There was another drug that was batter! around, sometimes face- 
tiously in the parlance of college students — "loco weed." It was perhaps 
the most widely known wild hallucinogen in the Southwest. There was 
nothing unusual about reading that a half-dozen Longhorns acciden- 
tally got into the Datum and ran amok for hours on a west Texas ranch, 
ripping up fence posts, attacking each other, bellowing well into the 
night front the gut of hallucination. Mushrooms, peyote cactus and 
limson weed, the three drugs Carlos contends Don Juan introduced to 
him after I960, were actually well known to him well before that. 
Despite the charming naivete of his books, Carlos Castaneda was 




92 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


acquainted with the three drugs of his apprenticeship well before he 
met Don )uan. 

Puharich and The Sacred Mushroom replaced The Doors of Perception 
and Rhine as the big topics of conversation around my apartment. 

“We talked about mushrooms and cactus which, ingested, expand 
consciousness,” says Sue. “ The Sacred Mushroom had just come out. But 
I had the feeling that Carlos knew a lot about mind expansion — natural 
or unnatural — before he read that book.” 

As always, Carlos more often took ideas away from conversations, 
rather than adding some of his own. Sometimes, he'd write them down 
for his short stories and poems or his work in psychology and anthro 
pology classes. By late 1959, 1 had enrolled in psychology at LACC and 
wrote a paper in which I explained my ideas about the “ambivalent self," 
only I did it by constructing a conversation first outlining the situation 
anti then adding another conversation, a more learned one, to explore 
the nature of ambivalence. It was just a technique for examining one’s 
other self. Carlos read the paper and thought it was a fascinating tech- 
nique, two conversations from the same writer, and he told me so. 

“Margaret had a fantastic sense for intrigue," said loan l>augherty 
about me. “She could quote Neville, discuss Zen Buddhism for hours, 
all kinds of mystical tilings. He listened, but was not the believer. In his 
books, 1 see so much of the Carlos I knew. There is a reserve there. I saw 
the skepticism in Carlos's attitude toward each new experience. I don’t 
think he ever doubted that any of these things was a possibility. In terms 
of mysticism, he had an open mind, but he wasn't convinced.” 

One day in early spring of 1958, 1 left the office at 666 South I.abrea 
to go up the street to the dry cleaners before the noon hour rush. 1 
picked up my clothes, walked out on the street and saw no one around. 
I was alone walking toward the office — suddenly, I saw Neville coming 
toward me. .As he approached me, 1 looked at him and smiled — he 
returned the smile — we never spoke. As he passed me, I turned around 
to be sure it was Neville I had seen — as I did so, he looked back, smiled 




93 V Beginnings 


again and kept on walking. The strange thing was I had been on a street 
alone with him, but as 1 turned back to walk ahead, I was on a normal 
street at noontime. 

For a moment, I thought I had flipped. I could not understand this, 
because Neville was in San Francisco giving lectures for two weeks. He 
wasn’t in Los Angeles at all. 

Well, you can bet I didn’t go back to the office and talk about my 
strange encounter with Neville. 

That evening when I saw Carlos, I related the whole happening to 
him and wondered how this could happen. I said the next time Neville 
is lecturing here in town, I’m going to ask if he ever appears to anyone 
in one city while he’s in another city. Carlos didn't react much to this 
tale of being in two places at the same time, but said he’d be interested 
to know what Neville would say when I asked about it. 

The next time Neville lectured I was right there. I knew I wanted to 
ask about his appearance to me that day on Labrea Avenue. 

When the lecture was over and he made himself available to answer 
questions for fifteen minutes, I was ready! However, a strange thing 
happened. Before I had a chance to ask my question, some one else rose 
and asked him if it is possible, when he’s in another city, for him to 
appear as though he is real in Los Angeles to anyone. He looked at this 
person, then he looked at me and said, yes, he could appear to people he 
wanted to appear to. I couldn't believe what I was hearing. He had 
appeared to me for some reason. I still don’t know why he truly had the 
ability to be in two places at the same time, or, at least, I know I saw him 
in what seemed to be an unreal circumstance. 

While both Carlos and I dated other people, it was an arrangement 
neither of us particularly liked. Both of us were quite jealous of the 
other. Carlos had a habit of coming to my place when 1 had a date and 
saying he wanted to meet my friend. I would try to dissuade him, but 
Carlos would come anyway, usually finding a place on the couch where 
he could observe everything and make everybody feel uncomfortable. 




94 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


Sometimes, he actually told my date to leave and not come back. The 
last time he did that was in January I960, when Farid Aweimrine, a 
young businessman from the Middle East, was at my apartment. We 
had been to a restaurant somewhere in LA. where everybody sat on 
exotic pillows and drank Turkish coffee, and afterwards we returned to 
my apartment. As usual, Carlos dropped by. Farid tried to make the best 
of it. During the course of the evening, he began talking about these 
visions he’d been having recently. One of them involved me. 

"There is someone holding a gun to you, Margaret," he said. 
“Someone wants to kill you." 

Carlos rolled his eyes around. Farid said some particularly flattering 
things about me that angered Carlos, who implied that he was some- 
how on sensitive ground. 

“I would have married Margaret when I first started dating her, but 
my divorce is not final yet," Farid said. 

“Over my dead body," said Carlos. “No one is going to marry her 
but me.” 

“So why haven't you married her?” Farid asked. 

“The thought hadn't occurred to me. But I’m going to marry her 
tonight." Carlos turned to me, “Let’s go, Maggie. We’re going to Mexico." 

All this took me by surprise and 1 was speechless. But Carlos was 
insistent about his proposal. He said he was really serious about getting 
married. Farid left, leaving us to talk about the implications of getting 
married, something both of us had thought about, but actually hadn’t 
discussed at any length. Finally, we got into Carlos' black Volkswagen 
and headed for Tijuana. A skinny, grey-faced little Mexican official mar- 
ried us once we got there and had us fill out the proper forms. He was 
one of those sad little men who seemed to take such joy in such 
moments and he played a peppy mariachi tune on the record player 
before and after the brief service. Estado Libre Y Soberando de Morelos, 
the record of the marriage, is still there. It reads: 




95 I Beginnings 


"Oficina del Registro Civil deTiaquiltenango. En el Libro num 5/960 
a fojas Catorce, bajo la Partida num. 14 de esta Oficina, se encuentra 
asentada el acta de Matrimonio de. Carlos Aranha Castaneda con 
Margaret Evelyn Runyan. Cuyo contrato se celebro ante mi con los req- 
uisites de Ley. Tiaquiltenango Morelos 27 de Enero de I960." 





Carlos abandoned his room on Vermont and moved in witli me at 823 
South Detroit Street. Sue moved out. Carlos continued his job in the 
billing department of Haggarty's, bringing in enough money to stay in 
school and make ends meet. My job at the telephone company paid the 
rent and kept us eating. He was coming home late at night after work at 
the shop and had to go to classes the next day at UCLA. There wasn't 
much time for foreign movies or concerts or exhibits. By summer, even 
the weekends were a bust. Carlos began leaving for hours at a time, and 
then days; I wasn’t sure where he was going. At first, I thought he had 
found another woman, but he denied that. Carlos said that he was 
making trips into the desert to study the use of medicinal plants by the 
Indians. “1 have found a man,” he told me one day; but other than say- 
ing he was an Indian and a teacher, Carlos said very little more about 
his excursions. 

These early trips to the desert were a direct outgrowth of an 
undergraduate class he was taking — California Ethnography. It was a 
popular course taught by a bony, garrulous archeologist with sharp 
blue eyes named Clement Meighan. It was Meighan Carlos would 
mention first in the acknowledgments section of the first book, call- 
ing him the person “who started and set the course of my anthropo 
logical fieldwork." 


% 


'>7 I Beginnings 


This class was one that Meighan taught every year. Each time at the 
outset, he made a deal with the students up there on the third floor of 
Haines Hall. Haines was one of those redbrick buildings on the UCLA 
campus with a freshly sandblasted look and ribbon gums and holly 
trees bending solicitously out of the peat moss out front. Concrete 
friezes with winged dragons and birds twisted their way around the 
edge of the red-tiled roof and there were grey arches over the windows. 
The first floor was occupied by French classes. Sociology had the second 
floor, and its grimy brother. Anthropology, had the third. 

A term paper was required in Meighan's class and anybody who actu- 
ally interviewed an Indian automatically got an “A" for the project. It 
meant actually getting out and dealing with a live informant and any- 
body who took that trouble, no matter how the paper turned out, was 
rewarded with an “A." 

“It's a lot of work to do this," Meighan warned, “and it's very difficult 
psychologically. You may put in an awful lot of work and get very little 
in terms of results, because you can't find the right informant or he 
won’t talk to you or he's mad at you." 

This was an annual admonition, which Meighan delivered by rote to 
discourage the faint of spirit from tackling something he knew could be 
an agonizing few weeks of research. Meighan's specialty was archaeol- 
ogy, but he'd paid his dues under the sagging ramadas listening to the 
ramblings of old informants of the California scrublands, and he had 
read the literature and all the rest of it, and so Meighan had more than 
just a vague idea how difficult something like this could be. 

“But if you show me in the paper that you made the effort to actually 
find and talk to a California Indian, then I will guarantee you an “A” on 
the term paper, no matter how it comes out," he told the class. Carlos 
was sitting there among the group of students and it all seemed fair 
enough to him. A good interview with an Indian would get him a good 
grade, but more importantly, if he could get a really good interview and 
then get the paper published, there would be no problems of getting 




98 I A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


into graduate school. Finding a subject for the paper was not a serious 
problem. There were dozens of conventional undergraduate ideas — 
basket weaving and potter)-, agriculture, religious systems, relations 
between the redman and white usurpers, all of which were things 
Meighan had seen a dozen times. Carlos wanted something sufficiently 
deep and scholarly to assure publication and yet he wanted to focus on 
something kinky enough to sustain his interest. After some rumination, 
Carlos decided on ethnobotany, the classification of psychotropic- 
plants used by sorcerers. It would be like being Gordon Wasson out 
there in the Mazatcc hills finding magic mushroom cults, or like Huxley 
at home or Weston LaBarre on the Plains. He read up on the subject, 
especially LaBarre s The Peyote Cult, and concluded that he was ready to 
go out and find himself an Indian. 

Out of a class of almost sixty students, Meighan got three papers in 
which students attempted to interview an informant. One student 
found an Indian on campus through an ethnic grant program and put 
together a polemic representing the Indian's views on how his people 
had been treated. Another lived on a ranch in Fresno Country and 
asked a friend some more or less routine questions about Indian 
lifestyles. Only Carlos went out and found an informant. Actually, he 
dealt with a number of Indians and went to Meighan's office two or 
three times during his early research to get direction and to learn a little 
about technique. In the beginning, he worked with a Cahuilla on a 
reservation near Palm Springs, and then went out on the Colorado 
River and worked with a few Indians there. Usually, one Indian leads to 
another and so Carlos started on the reservations and began moving 
from informant to informant, deeper into the strange ritual and use of 
medicinal plants. Ultimately, he found one man who related a great deal 
of information about [imson weed (Datum inoxia ) and it was that 
information that served as the basis of Carlos’s undergraduate paper, a 
piece that turned into a minor masterpiece. 




'» / Beginnings 


"His informant knew a great deal about Datura, which was a drug 
used in initiating ceremonies by sonic California groups, but had been 
presumed by me and I think most other anthropologists to have passed 
out of the picture forty or fifty years ago," Meighan recalls. “So he found 
an informant who still actively knew something about this and still had 
used it. He turned in a term paper which had a lot of information in it 
that just wouldn't have been possible to get, unless you had an inform- 
ant who was knowledgeable about this plant and material. It was a very 
good paper and I encouraged him to continue with his research. He 
reported on the fact that there was still an Indian who knew about the 
use and practice of Datura as a power plant. A lot of this came out in his 
first book. He talked about the fact that it’s very important what part of 
the root it comes from. There’s a lot of symbolism and fantasy about the 
male plants and the female plants and whether it is deep in the root. I 
doubt whether any of that had any pharmacological value whatsoever, 
although he investigated that. He went around and talked to various 
people about their beliefs. But that business about Datura, so far as I 
knew, wasn’t published in the literature anywhere. I've read most of the 
California stuff very carefully and that's where the resistance comes in, 
when you start asking people about a whole set of beliefs and use of a 
drug, when you start dealing with ceremonial knowledge and stutY 
that’s hard to get and not supposed to be revealed. I was very impressed 
with this paper. Obviously, he was getting information that anthropolo- 
gists had not gotten before." 

There was plenty of symbolism and fantasy, all right, and Carlos 
wrote it all down, all about the devils weed having four heads — the 
root, the stem, and leaves, the flowers and the seeds. And every part has 
a special role in the mystical order of things. The root, for example, has 
the power, or more exactly, the power is conquered through the root. 
The stem is for healing, the flowers alter personality and the seeds “for- 
tify the head." Carlos’s informant for this paper said the idea was to 
tame the devil’s weed as part of one’s search for knowledge. The male 




100 / A Magical lourncy wilh Carlos Caslancda 


and female plants are different: the female is taller and tree like, while 
the male is thick and bushy. The root of the female is long and straight, 
going down a long way before it forks. But the root of the male forks 
almost immediately underground. To dig the plant, an Indian brujo is 
supposed to use a dry branch from a paloverde tree, clean it, slice it and 
treat it in accordance with the ritual and technique of the infinite past. 
Carlos had it all down, quotes from the informant, paternalistic sides, 
strains of ritual and superstition, medicinal folklore, pharmacological 
data. But more importantly, he had on the record someone who had 
agreed to break the rules and let an outsider in. 

"This could be the man he calls Don luan,” Meighan says. “I think it 
very well may have been the same man, although he is not identified in 
the paper as the same man. He identified his informant by tribe and 
area, and so it’s either the same informant or somebody very closely 
related, because the background of the informant as he gave it — part 
Yuma and part Yaqui.” 

The literature said Yaquis didn't dabble with ceremonial drugs, but 
Carlos wasn't paying attention. He had found a real-life medicine man, 
which wasn’t all that hard to find, but the old guy was giving him eso 
teric knowledge thought to have passed from the scene years before. 
When Meighan raised those great grey eyebrows, Carlos knew he was 
on to something. He had struck a new vein and he got excited just 
thinking about the possibilities: a graduate paper, a thesis, maybe a 
book. The day that Meighan praised his paper and suggested the mate 
rial had added a great deal to the academic literature, Carlos knew he 
had arrived. If he had doubts before, the matter was settled — he would 
study anthropology. 




Part Two 


Spun by Allegory 





By Carlos’s account, he met Don luan in a bus depot in an Arizona bor- 
der during the summer of 1 960. It came during one of those trips to the 
Southwest in search of information. A friend, identified only as Bill in 
Carlos’s books, nodded toward Don luan when the old man entered the 
depot, saying the Indian knew a great deal about peyote. Bill, who bears 
a strong resemblance in Carlos’s description to Alan Morrison, was 
guide and helper in the drug survey. Like Morrison, Bill spoke only a 
few words of Spanish and on this particular afternoon, standing there 
in the muted glare of the late day sun, he made up some absurd phrase 
in Spanish. Don Juan didn’t understand and so Carlos stepped in and 
explained how he was an expert on the use of hallucinogenic cactus as a 
result of his extensive studies and research at UCLA. The Indian didn't 
seem too impressed, especially when Carlos got to the part where he 
said it might be mutually profitable for them to get together and talk 
about peyote. Carlos says Don luan just lifted his head and stared 
straight on with those hard black shaman’s eyes, a look that stopped 
him cold. It was the inviolable stare of an extremely tough man. 

The Don Juan described in The Teachings was born in the Southwest 
in 1891. At about the age of eight, he traveled with thousands of other 
Sonoran families to central Mexico. Mexican soldiers beat and killed his 
mother for no clear reason and then loaded him on a train heading 
south. His father, who had been shot and wounded by the soldiers and 


103 


104 I A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


jammed into the train, died en route to Central Mexico, where Don 
Juan grew up and lived until about 1940 when he moved north. 

“One of the problems with Don Juan,” says Meighan, “and one of the 
reasons there is criticism of him as an informant is that he himself is a 
unique individual. He is not really a member of any tribal society. His 
parents were not members of any tribal group, so he’s lived part of the 
time among California Indians and part of the lime among Mexican 
Indians. He’s not a pure Yaqui. And, moreover, he is the type of individ 
ual who raised himself to be an intellectual. I’ve met other Indians like 
this, but they are rare. You don't find the average person who is a 
philosopher or thinker and concerns himself with matters except on a 
very superficial level.” 

In mid-December 1960, after some reading and preparation, Carlos 
traveled to Don Juan’s house, but it wasn’t until the following June that 
his apprenticeship really started. During that first six months, Carlos 
saw Don |uan on various occasions, but always as an anthropological 
observer and not as an apprentice. First, it was to get information for 
the paper in Meighan's class and then, with the professor’s encourage- 
ment, he continued the association with more than a vague notion that 
the material was publishable. 

The Indian informant was not identified in his paper for the 
California Ethnography class. The name given to his benefactor in the 
later books was the pseudonym Juan Matus, hence Don (uan, a name as 
common in Mexico as John Smith in the United States. Meighan didn’t 
hear the name until about 1966 and many of Carlos's friends got their 
first real information about the mysterious Indian only after the 
University of California edition of The Teachings arrived in the book 
stores at UCLA in 1968. But Carlos had decided on the name Don Juan 
Matus before 1963. He and Adrian Gerritsen were having lunch at a 
Third Avenue cafe in Los Angeles in early 1963, when the conversation 
turned to Central American Indians. Through the Mormon Church, 




105 / Spun If} A 


Gerritsen had become involved with programs to help Indians on reser- 
vations in Utah, California, New Mexico and Arizona. 

“1 was wearing a turquoise tie piece and he became interested in 
my knowledge of the Indians," Gerritsen recalls. "He told me of a Don 
Juan who had been a medicine man. Carlos took a number of trips to 
his meeting place and they became friends. Don luan then confided in 
Carlos and Carlos was making arrangements to go see this man and 
others of his group the coming summer. Carlos told me he was going 
to write about this man and his fantastic history, but he wouldn't say 
any more.” 

Carlos says he began taking notes on June 23, 1961. The rules were 
simple enough and remained essentially unchanged throughout the 
apprenticeship. There would be no photographs and no tape record- 
ings. In the early going, Carlos took notes covertly, and later, relying on 
memory, reconstructed entire conversations and incidents. After the 
note-taking became generally accepted by Don Juan, Carlos was able to 
put down detailed and voluminous accounts of their conversations, 
complete with date, so that readers could follow chronologically the 
slow and agonizing development from Western student and rationalist 
to apprentice, believer and flat-out magic man himself. 

There are, however, a few nagging problems that always rear up when 
one attempts to reconcile what Carlos says happened and what actually 
appears to have happened. For example, did Don luan really deliver a 
dissertation on limson weed, the power plant that plays an important 
role in preparing the initiate for the state of nonordinary reality? If so, 
when did Carlos hear it? 

Don luan's instructions appear to have come well before 
Wednesday, August 23, 1961, the date listed in The Teachings. At least, 
Carlos knew the material before then, because he had written it down 
in his paper for Meighan. His undergraduate paper included all the 
talk about the weed's four heads, Don luan’s admonition that the plant 
gives men a taste of power, the significance of the roots, the cooking 




106 / A Magical journey with Carlos Caslancda 


process, the ritual of preparation — it was all there, things nobody else 
was getting, information Carlos says he got in 1961, but already had 
from somewhere the year before. 

“I think now, in retrospect, the reason he got that scoop on Datura is 
because Datura is not really very important in the frame of reference of 
his informant,” say's Meighan. "It’s one of the less powerful things in the 
guy’s stock of powerful knowledge, and therefore when Carlos showed 
up on the scene and was extremely interested, he dribbled out a little 
information, without feeling he was getting into anything." 

The problem, then, is whether Carlos's dates really mean anything at 
all, or whether they are another smokescreen. It’s possible that his 
informant in the undergraduate paper was not Don Juan, but some- 
body else who outlined details of something that Don luan repeated 
later. But Carlos acts as though it is all new in the first book, as though 
he'd never heard the Datum knowledge before. 

To make things even more confusing, Carlos says Datura wasn’t even 
the first drug he learned about from his Indian informant. His first drug 
experience was with peyote, he wrote in The Teachings, and it came 
weeks before the Datura conversations. But if that was true, if Carlos 
actually learned about peyote before he learned about Datura, then why 
wasn’t that in his undergraduate paper to Meighan? Why did he wait 
until his book was published, to jumble the chronology and present 
what appears to be a gradual initiation into the ways of shamans? It is 
possible that Carlos’s first book, and presumably those that followed, 
was a pastiche of fact and imagination, a collection of information 
gleaned from the deserts of Arizona, California and Mexico as well as 
the libraries of UCLA, and then assembled in a readable story form. It is 
also possible that the books he has written are careful and reasonably 
accurate records of his years as an apprentice. 

The only thing for sure was that the Carlos Castaneda of the real 
world was making trips away from the apartment through the rest of 
I960 to talk with the Indians. He was spending less time at home on 




107 / Spun bi .1 


South Detroit and only occasionally had friends over, and even then he 
didn't seem too interested in the current occult news. There was still 
some talk of I'uharich, but Carlos's interest in astral projection, telepa 
thy, ESP cards and the rest of it was on the wane. For a while, he'd try to 
explain the importance of his trips to me, but I wasn’t particularly 
interested. The only thing I knew was that he wasn’t around the apart- 
ment very much any more and I didn't like it. 

One afternoon he came in from the desert, with a bundle of what 
appeared to be dried Datura, though l couldn't be sure. He wanted to 
try an experiment and so he had me lie on the couch, while he lit the 
bundle with the gas burner on the stove and then he began waving the 
whole smoking flambeau back-and-forth near my head, telling me to 
inhale the smoke and just let myself go. Carlos wanted me just to float 
and free-associate; he wanted me to say whatever came into my head. So 
I began talking about the curtains or something as the room started 
folding in on itself, and the figure of Carlos started fading milky-blue 
against the wall, just nodding and writing in that yellow note pad, writ 
ing every streaming sentence I said. 

When I woke up a few hours later, 1 asked Carlos what had hap 
pened. But he didn’t seem very anxious to talk about it. He acted, in 
fact, as though the whole episode had been quite unimportant. He 
wouldn't show me the notes he had taken or explain what his grand 
experiment was all about. It was the only time he ever brought drugs 
into the apartment. 

Carlos and I began fighting more often, sometimes about inconse- 
quential things, but usually about his frequent absences during trips 
to Indian reservations. Finally, he decided to move out and get a 
room somewhere else for a while, at least until his research was com- 
pleted. So in |uly, he gathered his typewriter, his boxes of Latin 
poetry and biographies, his writing and sculpting gear and he 
returned to the Marietta Apartments on Madison Avenue. Under the 
circumstances, it was a better situation, because he told me he really 




108 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


was into something significant and he warned of more irregular hours. 
I wasn’t very happy with him bringing weeds into my apartment 
either; so as the new school year began. 1 left the apartment on South 
Detroit and got a place on Willowbrook, not too far from Carlos. 

1 was certain the marriage would never work. We had been together 
just six months and already he was lost for the weekends on his field 
trips, unable or unwilling to talk about exactly what he was doing. 
Having met a slender blond businessman named Adrian Gerritsen, I 
pressed Carlos for a divorce. He refused. But in the weeks that fol- 
lowed our separation, I hammered away and finally, alter much harp- 
ing, was successful in getting Carlos to agree. Assuring me it was a 
simple procedure, Carlos drove me back to Tijuana, back to the same 
official who had married us less than a year before, and he explained 
we wanted a divorce this time. Pulling the old man aside, Carlos 
explained the whole situation and had him prepare some papers of 
divorce which everybody signed. Carlos paid the man, explained that 
the divorce would be final as soon as the papers were legally 
processed, and we drove back to Ix>s Angeles. 

Carlos began spending more time with his field work that fall and 
winter. It was during this period he says he was introduced to 
Mescalito, the power and teacher and protector in peyote. Carlos and 
Don luan discussed the encounter with Mescalito, who had assumed 
the shape of a dog that barked, wrestled and played with Carlos — a 
good sign. By August 1961, he wrote that his relationship with Don 
luan was quite good, but his initial forays into the magical world of 
his Indian often left him in melancholy. There was a certain enormity 
to the system and a complexity in the ritual which Carlos found 
increasingly oppressive. With the exception of classes, much of his 
time was being taken up with field work. He almost never saw me, 
hearing from friends that 1 had married Gerritsen shortly after we 
separated and was now pregnant. 




109 / Spun bi i 


He thought a lot about me that summer, wondering if his work with 
the Indians was important enough to lose me. During the early going, 
Carlos tried not to skip a weekend in the desert, but he decided against 
leaving Los Angeles the weekend after his initial peyote experience, 
because it looked as though I might have my baby anytime. 1 did — on 
Saturday, August 1 2, at the Hollywood Presbyterian Olmsted Memorial 
Hospital. I vaguely remember Carlos visiting the hospital downtown 
after C.J. was born. 

A couple of years later, Carlos hit me with the news: we weren't really 
divorced after all. The Mexican divorce had been a charade, something 
to appease me while he did his field work. He intended to tell me sooner 
or later. How could he know that I would go off with Adrian Gerritscn 
almost immediately? How could he have known? 

Sitting there with me, Carlos explained that we were still legally mar- 
ried and, furthermore, claimed the boy as his own. I was stunned. My 
head started spinning. It was weeks before I grasped it and months 
before the three of us — Carlos and Adrian Gerritsen and I — reached 
any kind of understanding of the situation. It was more than a sticky 
wicket, it was a damn disaster to my way of thinking, and it took nearly 
a year of visits by Carlos at my new apartment on Dohenv Drive before 
I began to feel differently about it. From the beginning, Carlos devel- 
oped a strong attachment to C.J., whom he described as his spiritual 
son. He delighted in watching little C.). grow. At ten months, C.J. was 
walking with a confident gait, then talking. Carlos began taking the boy 
to campus and introducing him to students and other friends of his 
own. When somebody inevitably would point out that C.J. was blond 
with blue eyes while Carlos was dark and had curly hair, he would shrug 
and say the boy was a product of his recessive genes. Carlos never men- 
tioned me. The mother, he said, was a Scandinavian woman who lived 
somewhere off campus, a woman whose description fit that of Gib 
Edwards, whom he had known in LA. before meeting me. 




IIP / A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


Meighan remembers the story, as does Mrs. Upton, wife of the 
author, who was working as a receptionist at the University of 
California Press in the basement of the Powell Library at UCLA. She 
recalls Carlos bringing C.J. to the office several times while negotiations 
were underway for publication of his first book. But discussions of his 
personal life usually ended after a mention of the Scandinavian mother 
and the boy, whom he called Carlton Jeremy Castaneda. 

At his insistence, I signed documents with the California 
Department of Public Health that Carlos was the legal father. A new 
birth certificate was issued stating the child’s name was Carlton Jeremy 
Castaneda. Carlos had to sign papers, too, swearing that he was the 
father. Interestingly, he identified himself as a student who had been 
born in Peru. 

“The reason why 1 love that ‘chocho’ (Carlos' affectionate name for 
Carlton Jeremy Castaneda) is that he is a projection of you and will 
carry on.” he told me one evening. “I hope to teach him and work with 
him and bring about all the things that I'd hoped you would be." Carlos 
could be effusive and dramatic when he wanted to Ire, but he really 
meant it when he pledged to dedicate his field work to CJ. It was a side 
of Carlos that I had never seen, the loving parent who genuinely cared 
about C.J. 1 knew the flatterer, the ingratiating liar, but this business of 
doting on C.J. by spending hours playing at the apartment or taking 
him to campus was new. He never seemed so content as when he was 
with C.J. In real life, C.J. had brought a certain focus and meaning. In 
his books, he was vaguely defined as “my little boy,” the one who would 
become the final link in Carlos's convoluted allegory, the last connec- 
tion with the real world to be severed in order to become a sorcerer. 

While all this was happening, Carlos says Don Juan delivered his 
gentle prohibition against attachments, his shaman’s warning. He 
explained that Carlos’s apprenticeship would include a process of 
“erasing personal history," which meant breaking all ties with the con- 
ventional real world. In December, the Indian instructed Carlos that he 




Ill/ Spin/ fri i 


must slice off pieces of his past, little by little, until he finally had no 
history, no ties, no boundaries — until he became an absolutely free, 
sentient being, moving in a constant state of presence. Once one ere 
ates a fog around the past, Don Juan said, the future is wide open, 
mysterious, wildly exciting. 

Of course, this was something Carlos had been doing for years any- 
way, albeit for other reasons, and on a rudimentary level. Carlos had 
come to find that people have definite ideas about you and how you act, 
and he knew when that happened, you became inextricably tied to their 
preconceptions and desires. What the Indian was saying was create a fog 
and become lost in it and no one could take you for granted. 

Begin with simple things, Don Juan advised, the details of personal 
everyday activities like appointments, for example, and then move into 
removing the background, the personal relationships, lose Bracamonte 
had called Carlos a liar but Don Juan was saying that only those with 
personal history can lie. And he was saying something more, something 
beyond Carlos's notion that there are no biological imperatives and that 
the stories about family and home country were “emotionally" true, 
even if the facts were false the old Indian was saying there are no 
imperatives. It was the most serious sorcery of all, and what it meant 
was giving up relatives and close friends and C). It meant giving up C.J., 
because once Carlos got into the father-son relationship he would be 
promising things he could not deliver failing to keep appointments, 
offering affection that was not really his to give. 

In the field, Carlos learned about three drugs used to jerk one out of 
the rut of ordinary perception: peyote and its power Mescalito; Datura 
and its ally power; mushrooms, Psilocybe ntexicatitt, much like the flesh 
of the gods that had produced Wasson's "ineffable visions” in southern 
Mexico, about six years before. The ally that Don luan spoke of was not 
a drug at all, but a power that could be used as an aide or advisor, or as 
a fountain of strength. The ally was shapeless and could take most any 
form depending on the initiate’s frame of mind. 




112 / A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


There were spirits, omens and powers everywhere. But Carlos wrote 
about them in the classical sense — as part of a curandero's ancient belief 
system and so the whole adventure took on a certain respectability that 
the flat-out ESP magic mushroom experiments of Puharich and the rest 
of the occult crowd could not approach. 

When Carlos told Don luan about the white falcon back home in 
Cajamarca and about how he couldn't bring himself to shoot it. Don 
|uan nodded and assured him that was the right thing. The bird had 
been an omen and Carlos's Death had warned him not to shoot. Death 
and transformation were important shamanic ideas. Death was a being, 
a counselor who taps one when the time is up. an overseer who reduces 
everything to the egalitarian plain of mortality. It was an old ride that 
Death's tap was imminent and Carlos wrote that it was Don Juan who 
instructed him to live always under that impression. 

There was also a lot of mystery surrounding the idea of transforma- 
tion. In November 1961, Carlos left the campus and drove to Don fuan’s 
house, as had become the weekend routine. He found the old man’s 
daughter-in-law, a Mexican woman from Yucatan, tending Don Juan's 
dislocated ankle. He had fallen or said he had been pushed by a woman, 
la Catalina, the sorceress of power. According to Don Juan, she had 
transformed herself into a blackbird. Carlos was incredulous at first, but 
listened anyway. La Catalina's ability to transmogrify wasn’t anything 
new to brujos who have long understood human-animal transforma- 
tion and believed that the soul can separate from the physical body and 
make a journey, lust a few hundred miles from Carlos Castaneda’s 
hometown, in the Ucayali region of eastern Peru, the Conibo-Shipbo 
Indians say it’s common after taking ayahuasca for the shaman’s soul to 
leave the body in the form of a bird. The Amahuasca to the east in the 
Peruvian Montana say the same thing, as do dozens of other tribes like 
the Zaparo of eastern Ecuador and the Siona of Columbia and the 
Campa Indians of Peru. So Don luan was just one in a long line of 




113/ Spun bi i 


shamans passing on knowledge of the gift of flight. At one point, even 
Carlos took wing. 

On July 6, 1963, Carlos wrote that he rubbed a Datura paste over his 
entire body and, taking long springy steps across the desert, suddenly 
shot off the ground in a great booming elastic thrust, out into the 
ozone, the great purple emptiness of the Mexican sky, and he says he 
careened wildly through the air with his arms folded against his sides 
and his prognathic jaw jutting out front. Carlos writes as though it was 
Don Juan who first made the link between Datura and the Yaqui notion 
of flying. But, in fact, it was a friend, anthropologist Michael Harner. 
not Don luan, who first mentioned to Carlos he’d read something 
about Yaquis smearing the stuff over their stomachs “to see visions." 
The idea intrigued Harner, who in 1961 had taken ayahuasca with the 
Conibo Indians of eastern Peru, and so he asked that Carlos investigate 
the possibility that Datura paste was the ayahuasca of the Yaquis. It was 
all new to Carlos when Harner mentioned it one day on campus, but six 
years later Carlos not only had investigated reports of such a ritual, but 
also had participated in it. He wrote in his first book a long, detailed 
account of flying under the influence of a Datura paste that was intro 
duced, prescribed and made entirely by his own Don Juan. 

It was clear to Carlos this kind of thing was going to make great read- 
ing. He felt he was closer to. ..ft.. .than any other anthropologist or 
pharmacologist had ever been, closer than old Louis Lcwin and his 
Datura studies or Weston LaBarre and his peyote cult or even his friend 
Mike Harner and the ayahuasca test. But the only problem was that he 
was running out of money. He needed time to research and write, to 
bring all his imagination and flair to field notes and pages of library 
research, but classes and jobs were stealing his time. He wanted to pro- 
vide for C.J., finish graduate school and continue his work in the desert, 
but lack of money was making it hard. “He was starving to death,” 
Meighan remembers. He took a job as a taxi driver and then as a clerk in 
a liquor store. Carlos knew implicitly that he could put together a 




114 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


monograph of such insight and originality, a subtle blend of art and 
anthropology, that the entire department would be awed. The question 
was, would he ever be able to do it? 

Carlos took C.J. for a weekend in the fall of 1963. 1 often let him take 
C.J. for a few days and the two of them would go over to Carlos's apart- 
ment or to UCLA, where they would eat at the student union and make 
the rounds of various faculty members and fellow students. But this 
weekend was different. When he returned with CJ. three days later, 
Carlos told me he had taken C.J. to see his Indian friend out in the 
desert. He had told Don |uan about his “chocho," whom he loved very 
much, and he talked at length about all he hoped the boy would acconi 
plish in the future. But he was worried about money. Carlos had hoped 
to send C.J. to a private school where there would be lots of individual 
attention, so he’d get the best education possible. And then there was 
the matter of erasing personal history and how that would affect his 
relationship w ith C.J. 

Don Juan listened to all this, Carlos told me; he listened to all of 
Carlos's hopes and apprehensions, and then he just sort of nodded there 
and smiled. Don Juan looked down at C.J., who was playing in the dust. 
“Don't worry about the little crow," said the Indian. “It doesn't matter 
where he is or what he's doing. He'll be what he's supposed to be." 

And what a scene this was! Here was Don Juan, Carlos Castaneda and 
little two year-old Carlton Jeremy Castaneda, all squatting on the desert 
with this strange panoramic neo-galactic corona rising above every 
thing. Carlos was in the depths of some intellectual battle between the 
indulgent comforts of the conventional world and the values of the 
Separate Reality, and his brujo answered everything like he always did, 
with a perfect little shamanic aper^u — He'll be what he's supposed to 
be. But of course! 

One day when C.|. was two years old, he and Carlos were at UCLA 
standing on the steps of Haines Hall anil the boy looked up at the sky 




IIS / Spun bi i 


and said, "Look at the sun. It's old and weak. Tomorrow morning, it will 
be young and beautiful." 

This was the kind of innocent, almost primitive perception and 
phrasing that delighted Carlos and he told me about it that night. He 
was amazed about a year later when I told him how one afternoon C.J. 
and I were riding along the San Diego Freeway when suddenly, C.J. 
clamped his hands over his ears and told me to stop the music on the 
radio. C.(. said it was the same music “that was playing when they killed 
the Germanics.” Whatever the explanation, Carlos started talking about 
C.J. as if he were a Hedging California brujo or something. 

Interestingly, C.J.’s reference to the young sun and the old, dying sun 
seemed to make its way into one of Carlos’s books, Journey to Ixllan. 
Only it didn't exactly get written the way it happened. In the book, it is 
L>on )uan, not Carlton I ere my, who talks about it. 

According to Journey to Ixllan, the two of them, Don Juan and 
Carlos, sit and watch a blazing sunset one evening that seems to inflame 
the earth like a bonfire. Then they climb to the peak of some igneous 
rock and talk about the sunset, which Don Juan calls an omen, a per- 
sonal omen for Carlos, the creature of the night. In Don Juan’s own 
experience, the omen has always been the young sun, but for Carlos it is 
the dying sun that trashed through the low-lying clouds to rage in its 
final moments. 

Clearly, part of the conversation was fake, but “Don Juan” is real. He 
was a real Indian, somebody Carlos actually was making trips to see. It’s 
just that once Castaneda got to the point of putting it all down in a 
readable form, the Don Juan of his books became a different creature, a 
broad and omniscient construction made up of equal parts real Indian, 
pure Castaneda imagination, library research and dozens of conversa- 
tions and experiences with people like C.J., myself, Mike Harner, col- 
leagues at UCLA, his grandfather and others. 





In the field, Don Juan was teaching technique and philosophy, opening 
his great psychic shaman’s hag of mysteries. There was “crossing your 
eyes,” for example, which Carlos described as gradually forcing the eyes 
to see two separate and distinct images. It was tantamount to sec two 
different arrangements of the world, two perceptions of the world, or 
maybe it was two worlds all the time. The technique was supposed to 
allow one to detect subtle changes in the surroundings, slight alter- 
ations invisible to normal eyes locked on a single worldview. So, when 
Don Juan started talking about the twilight being the crack between the 
worlds, he was referring to the way everything important falls between 
two distinct perceptions of the world. 

Along with “crossing your eyes," Carlos says he learned about out- 
doing, a process of forgetting standard distinctions that everybody 
recognizes like, say, "pebble” as opposed to “boulder” or tree against 
the sky. The idea was to just let the great flowing Slipstream come 
through. It was a process of repealing socialization, of becoming 
primitively perceptive and of understanding that time, motion, color 
and the distinctions of space and shadow are the same. What really 
mattered was slopping the world and thereby achieving what the brujos 
and the South American magic men had achieved through the guid- 
ance of Datura and ayahuasca, which was to see. 


116 




117 I Spun fr.i .1 


But sometimes all this runic jargon had an anesthetic effect after 
awhile. What it all boiled down to was a verification of the old bro- 
mide that things seldom are what they seem. The Teachings say the 
world of common sense reality is a product of social consensus and 
the only way to get close to the real thing, is to strip away the explana- 
tions and assumptions that limit our vision. In essence, Don Juan was 
talking phenomenology, which was interesting, because that was the 
field Carlos had begun gravitating toward at UCLA, largely because of 
Harold Garfmkel, one of the nations' leading phenomenologists and a 
professor of his. In the simplest of terms, Garfinkel taught that social- 
ization was a process of convincing each individual that generally 
agreed upon descriptions actually define limits of the real world. 
What he was saying was that people generally agree on something 
being real and true and, therefore, it becomes real and true, the view of 
a few random schizophrenics, catatonics and autistic children 
notwithstanding. 

As a graduate student, Carlos found himself on the receiving end of 
some rather sophisticated phenomenology in the classroom. He went 
so far as to read and discuss passages from Ideas by German phenome 
nologist Edmund Husseri with Don Juan. A student of Husseri who 
knew of Carlos's interest gave him a piece of ebony that had once sat on 
Husseri’s writing desk. Carlos says he passed it on to Don Juan and 
remembers the Indian fondling it, much the way Husseri had done a 
generation before. And then Don Juan placet! it among his treasury of 
power objects used in divination. It seemed so perfect that somehow a 
paper-weight of one of the century’s leading phenomenologists should 
be passed back in time, back through the shamanic sweep, to be used in 
flat-out bugaboo desert magic. 

As he worked with the Indians in the field, Carlos also studied the 
conventional academicians, people such as Talcott Parsons and the lin- 
guistic philosopher Ludwig Wittgenstein. He began attaching classical 
terms to the phenomena of Don Juan’s world. 




118 / A Magical (ournty with Carlos Castaneda 


M [ have begun to understand sorcery in terms of Talcott Parsons's idea 
of glosses,” Carios says. “A gloss is a total system of perception and lan- 
guage. For instance, this room is a gloss. We have lumped together a series 
of isolated perceptions — floor, ceiling, window, lights, mgs, etc — to 
make a single totality. But we had to be taught to put the world together 
in this way. A child reconnoiters the world with few preconceptions until 
he is taught to see things the way that corresponds to the descriptions 
everybody agrees on. The world is an agreement. The system of glossing 
seems to be somewhat like walking. We have to learn to walk, but once we 
learn, there is only one way to walk. We have to leant to see and to talk, 
but once we learn, we are subject to the syntax of language and the mode 
of perception it contains." 

The classroom work was giving him a new language and an under- 
standing to deal with the results of his fieldwork, but in language there 
were limits. Carlos says he read a bil of Wittgenstein to Don Juan one- 
day. The old man just laughed. 

“Your friend Wittgenstein tied the noose too tight around the neck 
so he can't go anywhere." 





At the end of each year, Don loan and Carlos collected the ingredients 
for the “little smoke," completing a strange sort of cycle in which they 
would collect, prepare and store the mushroom mixture. The procedure 
was something Carlos says he learned the first year of his apprentice- 
ship, and then in December 1962, he went through the whole ritual 
himself. By the following December, it was time to start the cycle again. 

The secret smoking mixture, prepared with exacting ritual, included 
as its most important ingredient the little mushrooms, Psilocybe rnexi 
cam. He first smoked it on December 26, 1963, using the slender 
wooden pipe Don Juan had given him. Sitting in the dim yellow half- 
light of a kerosene lamp in Don luan's house in Sonora, Carlos lit the 
mixture in the pipe with a small charcoal from the adobe stove and 
almost without realizing it, began slipping back through the narcotic 
drifts. The smoke altered his sense of perspective, of hot and cold. He 
stared out through closed eyelkls at flashes of light on a blood red field 
and then a great blast of faces and scenery, flashing intermittently, slam - 
banging by in one mad vertiginous rush. Suddenly, he was lifted into 
the air and out through the ozone with tremendous speed; then slower, 
like a feather in the wind, floating back and forth in a slow rocking- 
horse pattern back to earth. 

He slept for two days afterwards and when he finally woke up, the 
Indian didn’t seem disposed to talk about it. Don luan would say only 


119 


120 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


that the mushroom had transformed him gently. It had given him 
power to lose the body and soar, which was exactly what happened to 
Carlos, or at least it felt that way. Don luan explained that’s all there is in 
reality anyway — what one feels. 

And at the root it was all the same. It didn't matter whether it was a 
vision of the Peruvian Slipstream or Don luan's Separate Reality, 
because they were identical, the same total-body perception of every- 
thing and the same apprehension of the world without interpreta 
tion — just pure flowing interconnected world. Wittgenstein knew it. 
Huxley knew it. 

When loan Daugherty met Carlos Castaneda for the first time in the 
spring of 1962, she was impressed more with his quiet, serious nature 
than with any burning ambition to complete his work on the Indians. 
He rarely talked about the project. It was C.J. he was usually talking 
about, or about Joan herself. I was still quite interested in astrology and 
psychic phenomena, but Carlos was clearly on to other things. 

loan didn’t ask a lot of questions or push Carlos on subjects he didn't 
seem ready to talk about. That's the reason Carlos felt so comfortable 
around her, and also because loan was interested in painting and sculp- 
ture. She painted a pair of matching clowns in oil for C.I.'s bedroom, 
and Carlos, looking at them one afternoon at my apartment in Beverly 
Hills, admitted he wished he had more time for his art. 

“He had very deep feelings," Joan says. “There was so much more to 
him than you could actually see. He seemed to know things, he seemed 
to have a sixth sense. When you were talking with him, it was as though 
everything was being programmed through a computer. He absorbed 
everything, every topic. He analyzed not what you said, but what you 
meant to say. There were times when you wondered if he was putting on 
a front. He seemed to read into all occasions, no matter how trivial, 
some kind of significance.” 




121 I Spun b) A 


When Joan told Carlos and me in 1964 that she was getting married, 
Carlos seemed surprised for some reason. For a few days he didn't say 
anything about it. Then one evening after all the congratulations were 
in, he said he was elated by the news. It was if he had to take things seri- 
ously, as if he was compelled to study all the ramifications before he 
could offer an opinion. 

“You'll l>e a good mother," Carlos told her solemnly. 

There it was. The ultimate virtue. Carlos appreciated it that loan 
never questioned his honesty. She never rolled her eyes around when 
he’d talk about some little incident and attach this great important 
meaning to it, this... significance... as if he were seeing things apart 
from everybody else. She believed him, and he appreciated it. Carlos 
was trying to figure out exactly what truth was anyway. There was emo- 
tional truth, factual truth, phenomenological truth, the truth of brujos 
like Don Juan and the greasy truth of short-order cooks. Everybody 
seemed to know what was true, and it was all different, and so who was 
lose Bracamonte to come out and call him a "great liar"? 

For all his respect for the sober truth and objectivity of academia, 
Carlos was still fascinated by the mystics. In retrospect, Puharich and 
Rhine were not the visionaries he'd once thought, but Huxley had held 
up well. There was somebody else who had caught his attention. As he 
sat there on my couch, listening patiently and smiling sympathetically 
at my talk of Neville, at that exact moment another philosopher-magi- 
cian had come on the scene. In the beginning, he seemed to have all the 
credentials, a position in academia and a kinky streak of abandon, and 
Carlos began reading all he could find about Dr. Timothy I-eary. 

Even before Leary was thrown out of Harvard in 1963, Carlos had 
taken special note of the strange doctor's psilocybin experiments, 
which were an outgrowth of Leary’s first drug experience eating 
Psilocybe mexicann during I960 in Cuernavaca, Mexico. Leary and his 
Harvard colleague Richard A I pert had founded the IF-IF, 
International Federation for Inner Freedom, with the whole effort 




122 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


aimed at "multi-family transcendental living" at Newton Center near 
Boston. The idea came from Huxley’s Utopian novel Island, in which 
the futurist I’ala Islanders ate visionary mushrooms, practiced Tantric 
Buddhism, hypnotism, eugenics, painless childbirth and multi-parental 
upbringing of children. By the fall of I960, there was an informal net- 
work of scientists and scholars who had taken psychedelics. Leary saw 
them in three basic groups: the detached philosophers such as Huxley 
and Wasson who understood the weighty theological significance of 
chemical revelation: the doctors with visions of a psychedelic renais- 
sance: and the less prudent god seekers who, like I.eary himself, were 
out to turn on the world. 

From the beginning, Leary and Alpert were under pressure to keep it 
clean. Harvard officials wanted the psychedelic research within the 
strictures of convention and laboratory respectability'. But for Leary it 
was not enough. The freewheeling LSD experiments and subsequent 
publicity prompted Harvard president Nathan Pusey to invoke for the 
first time since the mid- 19th Century the power to fire a faculty mem- 
ber for “grave misconduct and neglect of duty." By the time Iarary and 
Alpert were thrown out, they had given out 3,500 doses of psilocybin to 
400 subjects, mostly graduate students in psychiatry and theology and 
doctors and artists. Hobbled by government restrictions and ostracized 
by academia, the enlightened left for a small hotel in the balmy Mexican 
fishing village of Zihuantanejo, where IF-IF set up a training center. But 
this strange drug using enclave was viewed with a suspicious eye by the 
Mexican authorities, and on lune 13, 1963, the government gave the 
twenty Americans in Leary’s party five days to get out. 

The beleaguered Leary and Alpert, Leary's two sons and other cou 
pies returned to the estates and moved into a secluded and spacious 
3,000-acre estate in Millbrook, New York, just northeast of 
Poughkeepsie. The group called itself Castalia now, after the intellectu- 
als' colony in Hesse’s Magister Ludi. There they hunkered down on 
sweet Mother Earth for some extremely serious mind expansion. They 




123 / Spun by I 


were editing a quarterly by the summer of 1964, Psychedelic Review, and 
were performing lots of public relations schemes — like sprucing up the 
lawns and planting three acres of corn and other vegetables. It was all 
quite wholesome, all very reasonable and scholarly, and this great blan- 
ket of earnest convention was spread out over the whole endeavor. 

Leary understood all too well what the messiahs had always 
known — l hat it's not enough to see the light; you’ve got to market the 
message. And so he did. He entertained the new LSD noblesse, he 
proselytized fanatically and traveled to the West Coast and into New 
York to see friends. It was there, down in the Fast Village, smack in the 
center of the hippest community on earth, that Carlos Castaneda ran 
into the great Tim Leary. Carlos, in town to visit some friends, had 
become quite interested in Leary by this time. Word of his Harvard 
experiments, Leary's forced departure and dash to Mexico, and the 
subsequent return to Millbrook had been a big topic of conversation 
among the students at UCLA. You couldn’t go a day at Haines Hall 
without hearing about him. 

Carlos would come home and when he got over to my apartment to 
play with C.)., he’d talk about Leary and his psychedelics and his liber 
ation of experiments from the lab. This business of moving the whole 
thing out of the lab and into private apartments or out into the desert 
or someplace, anyplace, everyplace, seemed quite important to Carlos. 
Liberation from the gloomy eggshell walls. The old farts just snorted 
at the idea. 

But the thing was, Leary's experiments had the vague look of legiti- 
mate scientific inquiry. At least in Carlos' mind they did, and so he paid 
particular attention to Leary. Leary was rising on the East Coast as the 
hottest thing in psychedelia — a visionary whose time had come; Carlos 
kept close watch on the ascension from the West Oiast. He read about 
him in Time, Newsweek and Life magazines, in specialized publications 
and journals and he talked about Uarv in conversations with friends. 
Carlos had begun thinking a lot about Leary, even when he did his own 




124 / A Mjnit.il lourney with Carlos Castaneda 


psychedelic research with the Indians; and so it was a real surprise to 
run into the real thing one night at a party in the Fast Village. 

Carlos had the preconceived notion that he and Leary were somehow 
on the same wavelength, that both were scientists probing social 
unknowns. Carlos was wrong. 

For one thing, Leary and Alpert were stars here at the party and 
Carlos was a nobody. Ego was the game here, not science, and every- 
body was huddling around Leary who was slouched down in a peach 
wingback chair with that brilliant toothy grin of his. They were talking 
about mushrooms and acid, so when Carlos interjected something 
about his experiences with the Indians, nobody paid much attention. It 
was as if his words disrupted the flow of things. This was no gathering 
to talk about cognitive dissonance; Leary was preaching acid revolution. 
He was babbling on about the “elixir of life” and the "draught of 
immortal revelation." All the hip young scholars in bleached Levis were 
nodding, while Leary just sort of jangled at the joints there in the chair, 
going on in an eloquent stream of consciousness conversation about his 
mystical tantric crusading vision. He talked about the lantrics, the 
demons, the Sufis, the Gnostics, the hermetics, the sadhus... 

Leary was stoned. Carlos shook his head and looked disgusted. Leary 
must have seen it, because he sat up in the chair and glowered out from 
behind half-closed eyes, looking carefully at the way the light bounced 
off the Orion in Carlos’s suit and the way it was buttoned in the middle 
and at the Don Loper pastel shirt and that stringy little black tie with a 
knot the size of a grape at the collar. 

“What’s your astrological sign?" asked Tim l-eary. Carlos mumbled 
something about being a Capricorn. Leary nodded and sneered. “A 
structure freak,” he said. Then he turned to Alpert and giggled and 
teased him about being a Jewish queer. And Alpert, in turn, wasn’t say- 
ing anything, but just sitting in the corner, meditating in a long cloak 
making a great serious godhead-like face. Alpert reached into a broad 




125 / Spun by Allegory 


kangaroo pocket in his robe and pulled out apples and bananas which 
he handed to everybody. And he wasn't even smiling. 

The scene was a crude parody of itself. T he luminaries and hangers 
on were actually bumping into each other in the center of the room and 
they all had these horrible red rims around the eyes that always come in 
the final stages of a bleak amphetamine daze. The great Leary was 
indulging in incoherent revelations and Alpert was in the comer giving 
away bananas. People were caroming around. It was all just too hip. 
Carlos Castaneda, the one in the Orion suit, decided it was time to go. 




Carlton Jeremy started school in September 1961, but not in public 
school. I enrolled him in Saint Sophia’s Montessori School in Santa 
Monica, an elitist academy which Carlos thought would afford his“cho 
cho" the best education. Carlos had saved some money from odd jobs 
and used it to help pay the tuition, a stiff SI 20 a month. He told me that 
his money was part of a grant he had received at UCLA for work with 
the brujos. Actually, he was in grave financial shape, and having consid- 
erable problems making enough money to stay in school and keep C.|. 
at Saint Sophia’s. For a while, he sold academic books office-to-office at 
the university. He visited various departments and talked to professors 
and department heads about the merits of the Oxford Union products. 
The job kept him on campus and, at the same time, provided enough 
money to eat and pay the rent. 

In early September, Carlos had his last encounter with Mcscalito 
before ending his apprenticeship. It came during a series of four peyote 
sessions called miloles in the Mexican state of Chihuahua, just across 
the Texas border. Mitotes, of course, were nothing new to scholars. 
Three hundred years before, Bernardino Sahagun, the Spanish priest, 
investigated the peyote ceremonies and his classic work on the 
Tcochichimcca desert hunters had become standard reading for serious 
anthropological students. Sahagun had watched the northern desert 
hunters gather in the boiling yellow dust 300 miles northeast of the 


127 / Spun M ,1 


Sierra Madre mountains where they would sing all night and all day, 
weeping and extolling the sacred hallucinogenic peyotl of the Aztecs. 
The Huichols had used peyote to find Tatewari; Don luan sought 
Mescalito. But it was all the same: the diviners, the mystics, the Indians 
of the sixteenth century, the Guatemalan mushroom cults, the Aryan 
Soma hunters, the Legendary Shaman, they were all searching for the 
same understanding that everybody is plugged into the divine scheme 
of things. 

Much of this had been documented by scholars from Sahagun to 
I.aBarre. It was down on paper, scattered in a dozen different scholarly 
journals and a hundred textbooks and always the scholars explained the 
magic of the shaman in the solemn grey tones of respectability. 

And so the idea of finding Mescalito during a four-day ntitote in 
Chihuahua, Mexico wasn’t exactly a new idea. He knew the thing that 
would make his paper important anthropology would be a full discus- 
sion of exactly how the pcyoieros and the apprentices communicate at a 
rnilole. Carlos assumed it was achieved through a complex series of sig- 
nals. He had heard stories about how the participants saw and heard 
essentially the same thing during those all night sessions, while all the 
time remaining perfectly silent. There had to be a series of cues and 
Carlos went into the mitoie determined to decipher them. For three 
days, he watched them sing and chant together but saw no cues. On 
Sunday, the fourth day of the mitote, about the time he chewed his four- 
teenth peyote button, Carlos heard a dull bombardier’s rumble. It was 
the sound that the Indians said marked the presence of Mescalito, and 
as Carlos looked over the old grey-faced Indians sitting around him, he 
knew they had heard it too. The thing was, it wasn’t a real sound but 
only a rumbling way back in his head, so it was impossible that they 
heard it. There was no cue, no signal he could make out, but every- 
body’s face shone with the same understanding that the spirit of 
Mescalito was somewhere present. 




128 / A Mjnic.il Journey with Carlos C.isl jiic J.i 


Maybe his brain was just scrambled with peyote, but for some rea- 
son, he seemed to understand what the shamans meant when they said 
the entity inside Lophophora wittiamsii was out there, regardless of one 
self. It existed out there, out in the Slipstream. And suddenly Carlos had 
the sober thought that there was something terribly real, something ter- 
ribly serious about the superstitions of the Indians. 

As Carlos wrote about it later, he left the group and walked into the 
fields to find Mescalito. He sang the same song that he had learned in 
the circle and as he sang, Mescalito stepped out of a plant and stretched 
his long trumpet-like mouth to Carlos’s ear and said something. It was 
his spiritual name. And as Carlos stood there in the backwaters of his 
peyote dream, a clear light illuminated the entire field in all directions 
and the silver-rimmed desert skyline burned in the Hast. 

Carlos's years in the field had generated several hundred pages of 
field notes, some photographs, a brief 16-mm film and some tape- 
recorded interviews, most of which he later denied having. He had 
reworked his field notes all along, trying to put them into a more read 
able form. 

Sometimes he had peaks of great confidence in the work, feeling the 
project would be published, probably as part of the UCLA monograph 
series on anthropology. But there were other times when he was 
depressed with his field work and with himself. That was a real question 
even in its broadest terms. After all, he had never discovered the cues 
and, worse, had become something of a believer himself in some of the 
more inexplicable elements of sorcery. It was hardly an attitude that 
would wash over in academia. He wrote in the first person with plenty 
of dialogue to make it interesting, but he added long expository para 
graphs explaining in coldly rational terms exactly where he figured Don 
luan was manipulating his consciousness or where some of the phe- 
nomena he saw were merely products of hallucination. The tentative 
plan was to finish graduate classes and then take exams in the fall of 
1965 for a Master’s degree, using his work with the Indians as his thesis. 




129 / Spun 61 


But he ran out of money and, after an agonizing period of considering 
the options, he dropped out of UCLA. 

One of my friends. Alberta Greenfield, was working on a book with 
me about the telephone company. Carlos agreed to help write and edit 
it. He hoped his share would be enough to return to graduate school 
and get his degree. 

Alberta was a slender young woman with close-cropped brown hair, 
deep eyes, fine cheekbones and a serious look. She worked with me at 
Pacific Bell and between us we had more than a casual knowledge of how 
the sprawling utility operated, at least on the level of operator and caller. 
Our idea had been to write a book that included every conceivable 
scheme that people had come up with to rip off the telephone company 
in matters of installation, billing, long-distance phone calls, everything. 
The working title was Dial Operator. Alberta and 1 registered it with 
Writers Guild of America West in Hollywood. We took a humorous 
approach in the book, sometimes anecdotal, always light, as we covered 
the spectrum of devious rip-offs. We detailed dozens of ways to cheat on 
credit card calls. We outlined the possibilities and limitations of WATS 
lines. There were wild, convoluted schemes of unworkable dimension 
that we just dreamed up. 

It was all there, the most unscrupulous assemblage of inside knowl- 
edge ever about the workings of the telephone company, at least the 
rudimentary workings. But the copy was shapeless and unwieldy. It 
needed a deft touch and Carlos agreed to help work on transition and 
continuity. It wasn't top-drawer anthropology, but it was something. 
Carlos quit, occasionally returning to campus but never telling anyone 
exactly what happened. 

“It was assumed he was more or less a college drop-out type,” says Dr. 
Meighan. “That pattern is very common around here. On the few occa- 
sions that 1 saw him, he told me he was working with an informant and 
was writing down his work. He asked if I'd look at it when he got fin- 
ished and I said yes, I’d be happy to. 1 had the idea in the back of my 




130 / A Magic.il journey with Carlos Castaneda 


mind that he was like everybody else around here who was planning 
great things, hut they never got written. This is a standard game among 
students, academicians and novelists.” 

Carlos worked almost exclusively with Alberta on editing the book 
about the telephone company. My contribution had been mostly in the 
form of ideas and the work was far beyond that stage by the summer of 
l%5. All that was left was rearranging passages and chapters, tightening 
the prose, expanding on unclear sections and otherwise editing Dial 
Operator into a salable commodity. From the beginning, Carlos and 
Alberta didn’t get along. For one thing, she was abrupt and disputa- 
tious, and she had this rawboned look and was always wearing chino 
pants and oxford cloth shirts, which Carlos hated. Their personalities 
clashed at once and they constantly argued. It was clear after a short 
time working on the book with Alberta that Carlos would never be able 
to finish it. 

As Carlos tells it, his work with Don Juan and the Indians had 
reached its most serious and frightening level, frightening because all 
these doubts had begun to creep in about what was real and what was 
not. He had been experiencing brief flashes of disassociation, which he 
interpreted as shallow states of nonordinary reality. This was all hap- 
pening at the same time he was becoming disenchanted with Alberta 
and the telephone book and also concerned about C.J.’s schooling and 
his own future. Carlos kept taking notes in the field and in the library 
and he kept writing at home, but the grand design of his anthropologi 
cal novel was still scrambled in his brain. He had data, he had dramatic 
presence, he had brilliant characters — what he didn't have was a suit- 
able denouement. 

He was going crazy. Carlos would walk around Levering Avenue 
where he was living and then he’d go inside and sit down at the desk 
and stare at that pile of notes stacked up there at the edge of the desk 
and he’d just shake his head. Then right in the middle of everything, 
right in the middle of going absolutely bonkers from the pressure of 



131 / Spun by Allegory 


impending failure, just as everything was looking exceedingly grim, it 
came to him. He would simply go nuts. Just so! He would write down all 
his doubts and his flagging objectivity; he'd admit it all! 

In January, he became a crow in a mindswimming hallucination. 
Crow's legs sprouted from his chin, wobbly at first, pushing out from 
the soft meat under the mandible. Then a long black tail grew from the 
back of the neck and a great crow's wings broke through the cheeks. A 
month later it happened again, only this time he actually flew. He and 
Don Juan talked about the experience for days, and they talked about 
Carlos's recurring agitation and anxiety. The only thing that had kept 
him sane was the understanding that his experiences with Don Juan 
were the product of two things; drugs and the shaman s subtle use of 
suggestion. But when Carlos tried to pin him down, he couldn't. 

Gradually, he began to understand that there was more here than 
just . . .hallucination. There was more than being absolute man or 
absolute bird. There was something else. Maybe it was just that he was 
beginning to believe all this magic talk, or maybe some inexplicable 
middle ground really existed, a state of mind that was nonlinear and 
nonrational and otherwise nonsensical to the Western order of things. 
Either way, Carlos was the loser. 

If he kept a sufficient distance between himself and the Indians, as 
Sahagun had, the result would be interesting and scholarly, but a woe- 
fully incomplete account. If, on the other hand, he fell feet first into 
this Separate Reality business, if suddenly he found himself seeing peo 
pie as silver threads of light and so forth — if he went that route, then 
there would be a tremendous problem trying to sell the piece to the 
conservative faculty at UCLA. Tim Leary had flipped and lost his place 
in academia; Carlos wasn’t so sure he was ready. 

If there were any hopes of making a few dollars from the book with 
Alberta and me, they were effectively destroyed by the fall of 1965. 
Carlos stormed out of a session with Alberta, after she insulted him 
about something and he told me that if she wanted her book published. 




132 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


she could get another editor. And suddenly, there was nothing: no book, 
no school, an unfinished stack of notes on the Itrujos. Carlos returned to 
the desert. 

In the final months of what he'd later call the first cycle of his 
apprenticeship, Carlos wrote about sitting cross-legged on his power 
spot near Don luan’s house, singing his Mescalito songs and otherwise 
drifting along in the nebulous shamanic flow. After a few hours, Don 
|uan yelled to Carlos from inside the house, only it wasn’t the real Don 
luan at all — the voice was different and the figure that lumbered around 
the porch was heavy and lethargic. The Indian had a cold dull look and 
he made strange sounds at the door, gargling, whining and pretending 
to choke. He called for Carlos, who stayed out and the Don Juan figure 
finally left. 

Later, in the early morning dawn, Don luan stepped out onto the 
porch and stretched broadly. Except this wasn't Don Juan either, but 
someone else who had somehow assumed his form, or something like 
that. Carlos grabbed a rock in his right hand, assumed the fighting 
position and then suddenly screamed and hurled the stone straight at 
the Don Juan figure, which wobbled and shrieked and staggered into 
the bushes. A few hours later, Don Juan, the real one, stepped out of 
the house. 

It was a strange and frightening illusion. According to Carlos, the 
explanation was simply a diablern or witch who had assumed Don Juan's 
form and was trying to fool Carlos. This was all very logical in a sor 
cerer's world — one person taking another person's form and so forth. 
But to the rationalist, there seemed only three possible explanations. 
One was simply that Don Juan, fully aware that he was staging an elabo 
rate charade, went through the motions of being somebody else in order 
to teach Carlos some lesson. Or, perhaps Don Juan wasn't really aware of 
his own movements on the porch. Maybe he had fallen back into some 
deep religious funk, some schizophrenic other self unknown to the 
“real” Don Juan. If that were the case, the explanation about diaUeras 




133 I Spun In 1 


taking over his body wasn't exactly a lie — the old man actually believed it. 
There was a third possibility. Maybe, just maybe, there nits something else. 
Perhaps there existed something so primitive and beyond comprehension 
that it could be understood only in terms of magic talk and sorcery. 

The business about the tliablenis made quite an impression on 
Carlos. He quoted Don luan at one point, saying the female witch made 
her victim suffer unbelievably. The female exploits her prey, according 
to Don |uan, and Carlos figured he knew exactly what that meant. 
Women had always been the root of his most emotional and painful 
episodes: his mother, his aunts, me, Aunts Alta and Velma, Alberta 
Greenfield. Carlos had long begun to look on some of the women 
around Los Angeles as shrewd witches and that attitude sometimes lead 
him to overdramatize his situation, much the way he did when his 
mother died. He was, therefore, practically overwhelmed when I 
announced in early 1966 that I intended to take C.J. out of Saint 
Sophia’s and leave Los Angeles forever. I was tired of his broken prom- 
ises, especially the ones he'd make with C.|„ pleading to come and visit 
but then staying away for weeks at a time before showing up suddenly, 
unannounced, expecting the boy to understand. All I wanted was to get 
away from Carlos and hire into another job someplace else. Ours was 
the strangest of relationships. Separated for years, the two of us often 
saw each other and Carlos continued to take C). for daylong outings, 
hiking or walking around campus. On one hand, Carlos was serious 
and unreliable, yet on the other hand he could be charming and 
thoughtful — as when he assured me that he was working on the bntjo 
book for all of us. It would be a kind of tribute to my patience, he said, 
a paean to his "chocho." But when he finished the manuscript, there 
wasn’t that jolt of elation he expected. There was nothing, just the vague 
hollow feeling that he was broke, out of school and the owner of a con- 
voluted, unedited autobiographical manuscript about brujos that he 
wasn’t certain he could sell. And to make matters worse, C.J. and I were 




134 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


gone. I got a job at VVTOP, a TV' and radio station in Washington, D.C., 
as a Chief Operator and settled downtown. 

“When you took your little boy away, you really took the light out of 
my life," he wrote to me in September."! have told you repeatedly that we 
will not leave this earth without getting back the equivalent of our deeds. 
1 must have caused some of my fellow men the same anguish I am expe- 
riencing today. That is all I am ever going to tell you. Whatever I am, and 
whatever 1 feel about that little boy should be my concern alone. 

“My work has not been accepted yet; perhaps my spirit is not there 
any longer. I have tried to the best of my ability to be in the position to 
help my little chocho; and yet everything I do seems to be so useless. 
Sometimes I have the illusion I am rubbing his baby head. What can I 
tell you? What can you tell me that would bring relief to my soul?" 

One week later, he sat down at his desk with a glass of Mateus and 
typed a hitter response to a request by me for some money. 

“Has it ever occurred to you that I also need some one to help me? 
Do you think that I am a machine that feels nothing? Or perhaps 1 am 
only that silly looking Mexican that is good enough to be exploited, but 
not good enough to be respected. In my blind stupidity, I have allowed 
you to drive me against the wall; it is my fault alone. When I walked out 
of that school last year to help (Alberta Greenfield) write that book, I 
also walked out on all my possible opportunities to do anything in my 
field. Now I have to prove that I am reliable, and that would be some- 
thing similar to asking you to hold a job. We all have our own liniita 
tions; we should know and accept that fact, and at the same time we 
should have the kindness not to judge our fellow men.” 




Carlos used notes and his own imagination to work over the manu- 
script, rendering it in a more readable form. He first wrote long sections 
in longhand on his yellow pads and then moved to the desk to type. 
Much of the actual writing of The Teachings of Thin /turn: A Yaqut Way of 
Knowledge was done at his apartment. After his first peyote experiences 
back in 1961, Carlos had presented a long analysis of his visions to 
Professor (iarfinkel. But C.arfinkel didn't want to read some student's 
intellectual assessment of what was happening — he wanted the primary 
stuff, the straight detail. So Carlos rewrote and expanded it and showed 
the work to him again a few years later. But the old man still was put off 
by all the academic jargon and psychological explanations of Don 
Juan's behavior. So he worked through the manuscript in its entirety, 
and when he finished, he went up to the third floor of Haines Hall with 
his thick bound sheaf of papers under his arm. During the period 
Carlos had quit school; he and Meighan had talked occasionally, but 
never specifically about the fieldwork with the brujos. 

"He wandered in here one day with a completed manuscript, which 
he laid on the table,” Meighan recalls. “He asked me to read it and give 
some comments and advice, at which point I began to take him a great 
deal more seriously. His inquiry to me was to see if I could get this man- 
uscript printed in one of the monograph series of the university publi- 
cations in anthropology or some such series. 


135 


136 / A Magical Journey wilh Carlos Castaneda 


“I read it and thought about the kind of thing that it dealt with, 
which was an extremely popular subject and even more popular then, 
than now, because of the drugs and mind expansion which was a real 
cult of the moment at that particular time, and about the fact that a lot 
of the writing was personal and anecdotal and had to do with himself in 
response to a situation, rather than being a detached observer, which 
most scholarly writing is. The manuscript was about him as much as 
about anything else. So for both reasons, I felt that he had a book and 
not something that should appear in a scientific series. He tried to cope 
with that by segregating the more personal aspects of the manuscript 
from what might be called the detached scholarship." 

Meighan suggested that he go over and talk with somebody at the 
University of California Press, which was just across the lawn from 
Haines Hall, in the basement of Powell Library. He also suggested that 
Carlos not present his manuscript as something for the anthropology 
series, or any other series for that matter, but as a trade book with gen 
eral readership. 

Meighan and Garfinkel weren’t the only faculty members at UCLA to 
get an early look at the book. Both William Bright and Pedro Carrasco 
were visited by Carlos and were enthusiastic about the project, and 
there was Robert Edgerton, who had studied the work and criticized it 
at various stages from the beginning, 

One of Meighan s friends at University Publications was Jim Quebec, 
a slender, balding man with a grey goatee and an ingratiating manner, 
who had begun hearing reports about this incredibly detailed manu- 
script put together by some Brazilian graduate student who had spent 
years with a real, archaic, off the wall Sonorian bruja Quebec was sold 
from the first reading, but he was an old anthropologist himself and 
knew the real test would be the sales department. The manuscript lay 
around for weeks. It was copy-edited as usual and the editorial board 
met to discuss it, but sales wasn't exactly convinced that Castaneda's 
tedious discussion of life among the brujos was prime copy. Some people 




137 / Spun by Allegory 


started talking about bringing the book out as a monograph because, 
among other things, a definite concern existed as to whether a trade 
book by an unknown like Castaneda and published by an academic pub 
lishing house would sell. 

That's not to say that sales had the last word; it did not. litis was the 
respectable University of California Press, not one of those profit-happy 
bookmills to the east. There were scholars judging this stuff, resident 
masters such as sociologist and ethnomethodologist Harold Garfinkel 
and Walter Goldschmidt, one of that club of conceptual anthropologi- 
cal-sociologists who was always showing up in the textbooks and schol- 
arly journals, one of the boys from the stuff)' gut of academia. 
Goldschmidt was an intellectual, and a well-known one, but he wasn't a 
scintillatingly creative genius like, say, Talcott Parsons of Harvard or 
Buckminster Fuller or Marshall McLuhan, the social visionaries, or 
somebody like that. He was simply one of the resident gods who had 
published and flourished and had brought credit to UCLA. When 
Professor William Bright, who was sold on Carlos's manuscript from the 
start, wrote a letter to Quebec extolling the work, Goldschmidt read the 
letter, too. That was significant because he was not only a resident god 
he was on the editorial board of the University of California Press. 

Bright had seen some of the manuscript even before Carlos did some 
of his final editing and hired F.A. Guilford, a freelance editor, to go over 
it and correct the mistakes. “I've seen this manuscript and by all means 
you should publish it,” Bright wrote, and he went on about this remark 
ably creative piece of work he stumbled across. Quebec was suddenly 
bombarded with good reports from the anthropology department. 
Even one of his own employees, Atlee Arnold, a young editor who had 
met Carlos years before at LACC while both of them were students 
there, started talking about this guy Carlos (Castaneda. According to 
Atlee, the manuscript was a masterpiece, but still it lay around for 
another year, while the academics considered precisely what form their 




138 / A Magical lourncy wilh Carlos Castaneda 


brujo novel should take. For Carlos, who wasn't in school, all this wait- 
ing around was very disheartening. 

“It seems that my ‘chocho’ is what keeps me going, but once he is 
away, everything runs out on me," he wrote to me in January 1967. The 
thought of C.J. so far away made his stomach sink. “I mean, if I cannot 
help my ‘chocho’ I must be absolutely at the end of my rope. But that is 
a condition on which I will not prevail. I am confident that God will 
allow again that I scratch his head and make him sleep. Sometimes in 
those very simple acts we could condense the very meaning of our lives. 
Whisper in his ear that Kiki will do all there is in his power to help him. 
The battle is not over yet.” 

Carlos sat at his desk, behind his typewriter, writing one long dis- 
jointed paragraph after another and thinking how he ought to be doing 
more, sending more, sending anything. He picked up his billfold and 
took out a few dollars and slipped them into the envelope. Maybe when 
the manuscript was sold he’d have more money to send. Then he started 
typing again. 

“I will send my ‘chocho,’ I hope very soon, another type of first 
money. Perhaps, if I arrange the world in such a magical order, I will be 
able to see him again.” 

The editorial board delayed on the book. In the early spring, Carlos 
went to the desert to see Don Juan and the others. Upon returning in 
April, Carlos had a definite feeling that things were looking up. He had 
a feeling that he was going to make it. It was a pervasive sense of mood 
that came, at least partially, because he knew his thesis would be 
accepted by the anthropology department and probably published by 
the school. His letters, which had see sawed between vague optimism 
and desperation, exuded a hopeful tone and a sense of self-respect. 
Carlos was careful, however, to send letters to a post office box in 
Charleston, West Virginia, w hen 1 was at home visiting the family. My 
family, like my aunts, weren't particularly fond of Carlos, allhough they 
never asked me not to see Carlos. That wasn't the reason why he used 




139 / Spun In I 


the name Charlie Spider when he left messages at my answering service 
in Washington. That was just sort of an inside joke, since the word 
Arana is Spanish for spider. 

Carlos talked with Meighan and Garflnkel in the spring and got per- 
mission to take the exams he had missed the previous October while 
working with Alberta on Dial Operator. Dozens of people around 
Haines Hall were reading the manuscript, the few attuned souls, those 
who were aware of a minor celebrity in their midst, an underground 
aficionado of the shamans' netherworld... and then again, there were 
those who started doubting the whole business. 

It was that summer that the controversy really started, during late 
June and July. The field broke up roughly into believers and skeptics — 
those who felt Carlos’s apprenticeship was on the level and that his 
strange years of Indian mind expansion were really true, and then, well, 
there were those who didn't. Carlos was fully aware of how much of 
himself he'd put into his thesis, but he was fascinated nevertheless by 
the reaction on campus. 

“...Ours has been a long journey, full of intrigue and mysteries, just 
like I conceive an ideal journey ought to be like. Thank you Mayaya for 
your magnificent displays of excitation and nerve, now that I see our life 
in perspective. I miss your spirit. You are a strong invincible warrior. It 
could not be otherwise. . .My thesis was accepted and they had to let me 
come back to school," he wrote in July. “It has caused a big splash. Some 
people think the work w ill be a classic for a very long time to come, oth 
ers think it is pure shit. However, they all read it. The point of argument 
is the nature of the material ( brujos ) remember? and the way I have 
treated it. So now 1 need is to pass those exams. If I have a Ph.D. after my 
name I could say anything in my book and it would sound somewhat 
more credible. At any rate, the book, I have been told, cannot be put 
away after someone starts reading it, so even those who did not like it, 
read it through; I suppose they did that just to hate it. 




140 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


"It is intriguing to see all that turmoil. The book is the one I wrote for 
my chocho. He will make it into a blast, because he is the biggest brujo of 
them all.” 

The editorial board was impressed with the book and by 
September, after all the delay, it was obvious that the University of 
California Press would publish it. Bill Bright told the other board 
members that they had on their hands a masterpiece. Meighan agreed. 
Even crusty old Goldschmidt was fascinated by Castaneda’s apparent 
ability to go so deeply into the psyche of his informant and come back 
with so much information. 

At the same time. The Great Tear had reared up at Haines Hall, 
that haunting, almost unspeakable worry that maybe the whole 
thing was some kind of elaborate hoax. Nobody really knew how 
shrewd Carlos was. He had few credentials to fall back on. Maybe he 
had let his peyote visions roll and was now pulling the pinstriped 
shank of bluenose academia. 

"I can believe what he's telling me,” Meighan told the editorial board. 
“It was the same thing he'd been telling everybody for months. The 
sorts of things he is coming in with are too damned good. Even to fake 
it, you'd have to study anthropology for ten years in order to provide the 
kind of convincers or data he comes up with." 

Meighan went on like this, assuring, proselytizing, assuaging The 
Great Fear. He found himself inextricably tied with Carlos's predica- 
ment, watching Carlos as he had from the early days when he first began 
taking anthropology classes. And he had been stunned by the achieve- 
ment. Carlos had just gone to a corner and begun cranking out this 
soaring, phantasmagorical thesis without so much as a word from the 
campus cognates. Meighan looked around at everybody. 

“I know in a lot of Carlos's writing there is a lot of Carlos; that’s no 
mystery." 77te Great Fear was in the room. “He makes no effort to con- 
ceal that. There's no difficulty for me to sort out where it’s Carlos’s 
interpretation of what his informant is saying. Because of the fact that 




141 / Spun bi .1 


his approach is not objective distance scholarship, because it is not the 
way scholarship is generated by union card scholars, many people think 
this is some sort of fraudulent approach in which they apparently can’t 
sort out where it's Carlos talking and where the informant is talking, 
and they feel as though they’ve been fooled by being given anthro- 
pological information which is not Indian information.” 

Quebec, who was in charge of the monographs as well as other areas, 
suggested Carlos's work was the kind of strict scholarship that might fit 
as a monograph. Yet there was the matter of money, perhaps a lot of 
money, if the book were packaged with just the right sense of marketing 
and then pushed like crazy. Quebec saw the specter of hoax all right, but 
the dollar signs were blocking the view. 

“It’s got the mark of a trade book," he said. “I think the drug culture, 
the whole thing that is going on will, in effect, get the book going, and 
make it an important book financially.” 

The flags went up in Meighan’s brain. That attitude stirred up in 
Meighan a concern even deeper than the possibility of hoax, and that 
was the feeling that maybe the only readers of Carlos' book would be 
acidheads and cosmic dilettantes, the great pseudocultural campus 
hip — attuned, but vastly underlearned. Meighan feared that his student 
Carlos would become some kind of underground guru, and he knew 
there wasn’t much he could do about it. 

Meighan cleared his throat and looked around at the board. "I've 
known him since he was an undergraduate student here and I’m 
absolutely convinced that he is an extremely creative thinker, that he’s 
doing anthropology. He's working in an area of cognitive learning and 
the whole cross cultural thing. He’s put his finger on things that no 
other anthropologist has even been able to get at, partly by luck and 
partly because of his particular personality. He’s able to get information 
that other anthropologists can't get, because he looks like an Indian and 
speaks Spanish fluently and because he’s a smart listener.” 




142 / A Magical tourney with Carlos Castaneda 


Bright may have given the manuscript its greatest strength before the 
committee. He spoke in great glowing terms about how UCLA had this 
unique genius with a piece of the heaviest shamanic lore since Weston 
La Bar re's The Peyote Cult a quarter-century before. 

Carlos wasn't even on campus when the committee finally decided 
that the book would be published. He had left for Oaxaca in southern 
Mexico on September II, to see someone he called Don Genaro, a 
Mazatec shaman who was Don Juan’s best friend. 

The delays in publishing the book discouraged Carlos to the extent 
that he tried to get a couple of other firms interested in his manuscript. 
He told me he’d sent it to Random House and another publisher in New 
York. The rumor around the anthropology department was that Carlos 
had become so dissatisfied that he had submitted the manuscript to 
Grove Press. 

Actually, Carlos viewed the possibility of becoming a published 
writer with mixed emotions. He had been given some bad information 
along the way that his work could be used as a M.A. thesis or as a trade- 
book, but not as both, UCLA's graduate program, especially at the 
Master’s degree level, was in a constant state of flux and so it was difft 
cult to say exactly what was required for a degree from one year to the 
next, but this business about a commercial book being precluded from 
use as a thesis was clearly hogwash. But Carlos was under the impres- 
sion it was true and the day before leaving for Oaxaca he told me, "mv 
‘chocho’ and his crows will guide me to choose the best course of action. 
I am sure of it. After all, it is his book." 

I didn't think much about his strange use of metaphor. He'd long 
been talking that way, ever since the early days of his fieldwork. In 
casual conversation he would use words he’d never used before 1 960, 
words like “impeccable" and “warrior" and “invincible," absolute neo- 
primitivisms of the hokiest son. 1 never really doubted that Carlos was 
spending his lime among the Indians and I assumed these strange addi- 
tions to his vocabulary were a natural effect of it. 




143 / Spun In 


While in southern Mexico, Carlos thought almost constantly about 
the book. The project had become an obsession. Publication would give 
him the leverage and credibility he wanted, and once he got a Ph.D., 
he'd have the credentials to blast the critics out of their staid nine- 
teenth-century notions of scientific method. The feedback from cam- 
pus was that Castaneda was on the surreal edge of a significant 
anthropological controversy. The manuscript was still before the board, 
but he was confident and returned to the field to take notes again, back 
among the Indians, collecting more data with crazy ideas sort of swim- 
ming around, that he would turn out another of these “classics." Only 
this time, it would read more like a novel. It would be a sequel, but more 
than that, it would showcase his talent as a writer. 

When he returned from three weeks of field work around Oaxaca, 
Carlos checked in with Quebec, who told him the book would be pub- 
lished by the school and distributed in 1968. He had expected it, but still 
the news was exciting. Things were finally going his way. Carlos signed a 
contract with the University of California Press on September 23 and 
then went back to his apartment and wrote me. 

“It will be published as an important contribution to anthropology. 
How do you like that? Now all I have to do is finish the exams I did not 
lake in 1965. The people at the school here did not let me take them and 
they maintained their stubborn attitude until the thesis was obviously 
approved by everybody else. Some school in New York, Columbia 
University, offered me a scholarship to get my Ph.D. there, so the 
cronies here decided to let by gones be bv-gones. The only thing is that 
I may eventually go to New York. I am very tired of here." 

Carlos had friends in New York, some of them old colleagues who 
were now at the New School of Social Research and at Columbia. It was- 
n't a prospect Meighan and Carfmkel weren't too happy about. They 
knew they had a flat-out protege in Carlos, a self-contained scholar who 
would bring added respect to the department. They were convinced that 
he was a legitimate researcher who had this knack for writing readable 




144 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


prose about something that was radically different from the mainstream. 
Furthermore, the idea of losing Castaneda and later having him criticize 
the red tape and delays at UCLA did not sit well. 

Once word got out that a contract had been signed, The Great Fear 
was on everybody’s mind. Everybody at Haines Hall knew how damned 
silly the department would look if this whole Don )uan story turned out 
to be a shuck job. 

The contract was the standard arrangement, whereby the Regents of 
California got the copyright and the author got royalties from publica- 
tion. The University of California didn't buy the book outright. Instead, 
it was a percentage arrangement, which Quebec explained would mean 
hundreds or thousands of dollars for Carlos, all depending on the suc- 
cess of the book. Immediately after signing the contract in Quebec’s 
office, Carlos went downtown and bought something he had wanted 
for years — a grey three-piece suit. When he looked at himself in his new 
three-piece, standing there in the tluee-sided prism of a full-length mir- 
ror, exuding an absolute sense of worth and formality, as he just stood 
there under the neon lights and looking straight at himself, Carlos 
thought of Aldous Huxley. 

There was still a lot to do before publication. The final editing would 
take weeks, and then there was the matter of design, particularly the 
dust jacket. Carlos came up with some photographs and notes, but few 
suggestions. Most of the photos were black and white, standard shots 
he’d taken of expansive desert and Mexican hovels with sagging 
ramadas and bony dogs out front. One was a color portrait of an 
ancient nut-brown man with grey crinkly hair and leathered skin and a 
noble look, and Quebec figured it was a natural for the cover. The thrust 
of the book was a Paleolithic magic man who befriended young Carlos 
and taught him the lifestyle of the Mexican shaman, and so the photo- 
graph would be great for the cover, Carlos jerked the photo away. “No 
way,’’ he said, and continued to reject ideas that people came up with. 
Ideas like decorating the cover with a nest of electric lizards exploding 



145 / Spun by Allegory 


in a rainbow of colors. Carlos rolled his eyes at that one. He wanted 
something less provocative, something more respectable, and that's 
exactly what he got. As published by the university. The Teachings of 
Doit Juan: A Yaqui Way of Knowledge had a simple cream and green 
cover with the title stretching across the dust jacket in meek and soulless 
Franklin Gothic type, as if it were The Central Nervous System of the 
FJasmohranch, or one of those other pieces of esotcrica the university 
press was turning out. 

In late November, Carlos went to New York to tie up some loose ends 
and then traveled down to Washington for a week to visit with C.J. and 
me, who had been there about a year. 

The Teachings of Don Juan: A Yaqui Way of Knowledge was released in 
early spring and the University of California Press, fully cognizant that a 
nation of drug-infatuated students was out there, moved it into 
California bookstores with a vengeance, particularly around Los 
Angeles and in the Bay Area up north. Autograph sessions were organ 
ized where Castaneda dutifully appeared wearing his three-piece. He 
was hardly a celebrity, but Carlos did enjoy the attention. 

The university press pushed the book in college towns to the east and 
it began catching on. People began reading it, especially in New York 
and Boston. It (vegan selling hundreds of copies a week, better than any 
other original work published by the University of California, and it 
was selling to everybody: anthropologists, lay anthropologists, social 
scientists, English students, amateur phenomenologists and wacked 
out visionary guru types from the deep New England woods. Within a 
matter of months, Carlos Castaneda was a valuable commodity. He had 
easy access to Quebec’s office and he went there often, checking on how 
well the book was doing and laughing about the sudden upturn in his 
life. He was still eating hamburgers at Denny's in Hollywood, he told 
Quebec, but by God, it was a matter of choice. 

Once The Teachings was off and running, Carlos confided in Quebec 
that he was writing a second book, a kind of sequel. 




146 I A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


Quebec knew it was time Carlos had an agent. He sent Carlos down- 
town to a friend, Ned Brown, a competent scrambler with several 
clients who had met with quick success. Carlos heard about people sud 
denly made rich, and so he was more than happy to meet with Brown. 

“Carlos, I'm going to make you famous," Brown said, figuring that's 
what he wanted to hear. 

Carlos looked away. “Damn," he said. “I want the money." 

Brown was startled for a moment and then he smiled. It was clear 
that he and the mystic were on the same wavelength after all. 





It was clear within six months that The Teachings had the potential for 
mass distribution and the University of California Press’s New York 
manager started making contracts with larger publishing houses that 
might want it. Ballantine came up with the best offer: $23,000 for four 
years of limited trade, at which point everything reverted back to the 
University of California Press. A few years later, after Carlos had made a 
national name for himself, the press made even more money from their 
original contract, reselling it to Simon and Schuster for its own hard- 
cover edition, but retaining the original hardcover rights for itself and 
the rights for another paperback. 

Ballantine came out w ith its version in April 1969, a 276-page paper- 
back wrapped in an eerie Wilson MacLean painting of peyote blooms 
and muted rainbow arch and symmetrical profiles of Don luan and the 
translucent, marvelously attuned apprentice, both staring black-eyed 
out at the crack between the worlds or something. It was a hit and into 
its second printing by October. 

Carlos never got his M.A. Instead, he continued taking upper-level 
classes and began the second book, the plan being to go directly for his 
Ph.D. That wasn’t going to be easy, because while he was the creative 
darling of the attuned, he was clearly anathema to those faculty mem- 
bers gripped by The Great Fear. Some of the professors knew bone-deep 
that Carlos had foisted a magnificent fraud upon the university, upon 


147 




148 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


their revered department. Others were more trusting, but criticized the 
book as an indulgent antischolastic work of a frustrated novelist, which 
was pretty much true. What really irritated this group was the rejection 
of the standard procedure of being a detached observer without ego, 
and they didn’t like it that Castaneda was carrying it off so well. 
Suddenly, Carlos Castaneda was the most famous anthropologist in 
America, but the boy's back in the department had let go with a swelling 
academic chorus that rose up out of the faculty lounge at Haines Hall 
like the fulsome cry of a pack of jackals — where was the objectivity, 
where was the detachment, where was the chi-square analysis? 

An obscure piece of literary history began making the rounds at 
UCLA. People began talking about the Ossian poems, a collection of 
poetry published in 1760 by a young Scotsman named lames 
MacPherson. The real name of the collection was Fragments of Ancient 
Poetry Collected in the Highlands of Scotland and Translated from the 
Gaelic or Erse Language, which is not exactly what they were. The poems 
were neither ancient nor collected in the highlands of Scotland, nor 
translated; they were total fabrications. But it took the self-assertive Dr. 
Johnson to declare in print what some others had only suspected. 

People were taking pot shots at Carlos, but there was no Samuel 
Johnson in the crowd, no dominant personality with an overweening 
self-confidence who would stand up and announce that The Great 
Fear was operating for good reason — because Castaneda was a fake. 
Nobody did that, but there was a lot of what Meighan calls “scuttle- 
butt and chitchat.” And throughout it, Meighan remained one of 
Carlos's greatest defenders. 

During the summer of 1968, Meighan asked Carlos to come over to 
his house in Topanga and help as an unpaid extra in a film the professor 
was shooting about Indian rock paintings. What he needed was a pair of 
Indian hands, and Carlos’s were brown and stubby enough. Carlos 
drove to Meighan's house for a couple of days and they shot and reshot 
scenes of Carlos’s hands crushing berries and stirring earth mixtures in 




149 / Spun b) 


crude pottery and painting primitive animals of the hunt on the 
Topanga outcroppings in Meighan's back yard. The actual filming took 
less than an hour. The rest of the time they prepared for scenes or ate or 
just talked about Carlos's future plans. 

“I was embarrassed to ask him to do this." Meighan says. “He was 
beyond this, but it was such a picnic. We had lunch, sat around and chewed 
the fat. He liked it. He's really an amiable, very agreeable character." 

The film was distributed by the university as a classroom teaching aid. 

That was the same summer that Carlos says he resumed his appren- 
ticeship with Don |uan. Carlos's work with Don |uan ended in the fall 
of 1 %5 and began again in April 1 968, according to his first two books. 
But his association with the Indians continued unabated throughout 
that period. He made several trips to Mexico to visit the locals and to 
take notes, but none of that appeared in his books. 

There is simply a neat resumption of the apprenticeship in April and 
by the next month, he and Don |uan travel to Huichol country in 
northeastern Mexico for a peyote session, a four-day rnitote during 
which Carlos decides to stay away from the peyote. He wants to watch 
with a clear head for the signals and subtle moves that he knows are 
there, the ones the guides uses to manipulate everyone's perception. The 
visions, which Carlos knows should be highly personal, are the same for 
everybody, which seems impossible. So Carlos watches for four days 
trying to pick up on how they do it, but there are no signals and no 
cues. There is... nothing. And on the final night of the mitotc everybody 
sees Mescalito, the spirit and force of peyote, the being, hovering over 
Carlos's own head, a green glowing spirit just floating there in dry air. 
Nobody said anything; there were no signals. Everybody just sits there 
in a circle with their mouths dropped open, staring at exactly the same 
spot, at exactly the same moment, staring at. . .something. . .and damned 
if Carlos ever saw the cue. 

It was hardly the kind of thing he needed for his Ph.D. dissertation, 
just more of Don luan’s primitive magic talk about an extant spirit, 




ISO ! A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


and so Carlos was pretty much back at the beginning. At UCLA, 
Garfinkel kept channeling Carlos's confusion through the filler of phe- 
nomenology, which made him feel as though he understood shaman 
ism to some degree. 

Phenomenologists say people interpret and evaluate phenomena 
according to all those cultural and societal data that are thrust upon the 
impressionable mind from the instant of birth. It is because of it, that a 
chair, for example, is recognized as a chair with four legs and a back and 
not as a couch. It’s why a tree standing out over the horizon is quite nat- 
urally separated in the mind from the horizon. It’s all learned behav ior, 
and it varies, at least to some degree, from society to society, depending 
on culture, history and language. So the way Garfinkel saw it, Don 
luan’s task was to force Carlos to unlearn and rearrange phenomena 
along new patterns. 

Having returned to classes by September, Carlos was something of a 
sensation. Ballantine had agreed to publish the book for the mass mar- 
ket; he had some money, a little security, a sense of direction, and 
already he was into his second book and on his way to a Ph.D. People 
started coming up to him on campus, pressing him for the whereabouts 
of Don Juan and asking questions about the apprenticeship. For the 
first time, Carlos began taking precautions to be sure he wasn’t being 
followed when leaving for field trips in Mexico. 

In October, Carlos says he met Don Genaro, a younger friend of Don 
luan’s, an agile man in his early sixties. From the beginning, Don 
Genaro demonstrated a marvelous control over his body. For example, 
Carlos says he saw Don Genaro flip over onto his hands and stand on 
his head with legs crossed and arms against his chest and his nostrils 
flared out at twice their normal size. And then there was the ballet at the 
waterfall, which Carlos describes in A Separate Reality. 

It was in Oaxaca that Don Genaro ascended the precipitous boulders 
at the edge of the waterfall. Don Juan, Carlos and two young appren- 
tices arranged small flat rocks in a line at the river’s edge and sat to 




151 / Spun bt i 


watch. Several times Don Genaro appeared to lose his footing and slip, 
sliding or dangling for a while, but always regaining his composure and 
continuing the ascent. Finally, he made it to the top, where he stood on 
a peaking boulder for a long time, in perfect stillness, with the water 
raging on both sides. Then suddenly, he bounded across the falls to the 
tip of another rock. Finally, after an afternoon of elliptical leaps at the 
water's edge. Genaro threw his arms up and Hipped in a strange stop- 
time lateral somersault, disappearing behind some rocks. Everybody 
got up and headed for the car. Carlos wanted to find out where Don 
Genaro had gone, whether he was hurt, but Don Juan said no. They had 
seen the exhibition, the rest didn't matter. Don |uan admonished Carlos 
it was time to leave. 

Although the water-ballet occurred in October 1968, according to 
Carlos, it didn't appear in print until 1971, a full year after a lecture 
series at UCLA where anthropologist Peter Furst told much the same- 
story. Carlos appeared during the series, too, as did Douglas Sharon, a 
friend who had done extensive research into Peruvian shamanism. 
Furst, who was at the Latin American Center on the tenth floor of 
Bunch Hall, also qualified, having as he did, the requisite insight into 
psychedelic phenomena and its cultural and historical dimensions. 

Carlos told about Don Gcnaro's ballet at the waterfall during the lec- 
ture series. It bore a remarkable resemblance to burst’s account earlier 
among the Huichols. 

During a field trip in the summer of 1966, burst's friend and fellow 
hikuri (peyote) seeker, Ram6n Medina Silva, performed at the edge of a 
spectacular waterfall. It was a demonstration for a small group of 
Huichols on the meaning of “balance.” Ranfon took off his sandals, 
made the appropriate gestures of ritual, and then leaped from rock to 
rock, sometimes gripping the slippery edge of boulders, sometimes 
standing motionless and then suddenly, making a great leap across the 
water. He would hide for awhile behind a massive rock and then leap 
out over another one. Nobody, except Furst and his wife, seemed the 




152 / A Magical journey wilh Carlos Castaneda 


least bit apprehensive about all this, and that included Ramon's wife, 
who sat calmly with the others in a semicircle at the river's edge. 

The next day, Ramon explained that his exhibition was not just a 
foolhardy display, but a legitimate shaman's method of illustrating what 
it means "to have balance.” There was something imperative in that for 
the shaman, something incredibly important about crossing the bridge 
that links the ordinary world with the world beyond, and standing there 
on the bridge to look down on the snakes below, the great stamping 
horde, the carnivores, the wild animals jabbering and stamping in the 
boiling yellow dust — there was something absolutely necessary about 
crossing that stretch of cosmos and reaching the separate world beyond. 
The idea of moving from one world to another was so incomprehensi- 
ble to burst, except on a vague abstract level, that it was necessary for 
Ram6n to give a kind of physical interpretation in which he demon- 
strated balance with a hope the Anglo would extrapolate a bit. It was a 
crazy wild experience and all part of the literature. Furthermore, it was 
well known around the Latin American Center, after Furst returned 
from the field in I960. 

So it was strange that Carlos Castaneda should appear on the same 
program with Furst and tell much the same story four years later. That’s 
not to say Carlos merely elaborated on burst's intriguing story — even 
burst didn't think that. Ramon had told him the ballet of the waterfall 
was “a specialty of shamans,” and so it was highly probable that magic 
men everywhere were doing much the same thing. 

And yet there was a nagging doubt. Here was another case in which 
Castaneda heard something and later wrote about much the same thing 
in incredible detail and with a magnificent sense of drama. First there 
was Michael Harner, telling Carlos about how the Yaquis may rub 
Datura ointment over their bellies and then burst, and his experiences 
at the waterfall. 

Sometimes Carlos would try out stories on friends, stories that later 
appeared in print in a more complete form. Sitting in Quebec’s office 




153 / Spun b) 


one afternoon, Carlos began talking about some of his field work in 
Oaxaca. He told about how he was at a restaurant and saw three 
Mexican urchins outside the hotel on the curb, trying to round up cus 
tomers for their street -side shoeshine business. They weren't having 
much luck, but Carlos noticed that after each customer left a table along 
a shaded sidewalk cafe, the boys would rush to the table and eat all the 
scraps of food that remained, the ice cubes, the lemon peels, everything. 
Apparently, the hotel had an agreement with the boys — they could hang 
around and have the leftovers if they promised not to break anything or 
harass the customers. 

All well and good. That was the extent of Carlos’s little story in 
Quebec’s office. But later, when it appeared in the first chapter of A 
Separa le Reality, published in 1971, Don luan imparts his lesson on the 
whole affair, The ancient Indian chides Carlos for feeling sorry for the 
urchins and disputes the idea that Carlos’s life is any better. If Carlos’s 
life was more varied, it was nevertheless the product of the hopelessly 
vacuous Anglo world of L.A. where the chances of becoming a man of 
knowledge were very slim. That was the important thing, not his access 
to UCLA and concerts and exhibits and eating hamburgers at 
Denny’s — the single most important thing in life was becoming a true 
shaman, and that was something the urchins had a chance at. All the 
men of know ledge L>on )uan knew had been kids like those at the table, 
eating the scraps of somebody elsc’s meal. It was a great moral, another 
sterling aperyu, but for Quebec, the attendant Don luan philosophy had 
to wait until the book was on the market. 

There were other stories too, other experiences in the desert that 
Carlos told in casual conversation or over lunch, which later turned up 
in a more complete, detailed and didactic form in one of his books. 
When he’d see Douglas Sharon, he'd string his experiences together in 
an enthusiastic monologue. 

“The thing is that when you talk to Carlos, he carries the ball," said 
Sharon. “He does most of the talking. You don’t have a chance to get a 




154 ! A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


word in edgewise. He's always into the current thing, and he's very good 
in a group, very clear about the philosophy and he really likes to spell it 
out. I get the impression that Carlos is a master storyteller and that’s 
typical for a lot of Peruvians. Eduardo (Sharon's shaman teacher from 
Peru) is one of the best and that's another thing about shamanism. 
Usually they are masters of the dramatic art. That's one of the secrets of 
shamanism, really being a good actor, really being able to put on a good 
show, because that's all part of this whole shamanizing process, the psy 
chodrama of it." 





Carlos talked with me on the telephone in June 1969 about my pending 
trip to 1-os Angeles. I wanted to visit some old friends on the coast and 
see how things had changed in the years I'd been away, and when Carlos 
read I was coming in a letter, he insisted on getting me a suite at the 
Hollywood Roosevelt Hotel. He was excited about it, anxious to see me 
and CJ. and talk about our lives in Washington and fill us in on the suc- 
cess of his book. The prospect of seeing C.J. again was exhilarating. It 
was the best news he’d heard in months and Carlos started planning 
activities just for the two of them, like hiking and trips to the campus 
and movies, especially movies which had become Carlos’s passion. He 
had the money now and rarely a week went by that he didn't take in a 
couple of movies downtown or someplace on campus. 

C.J. and I were to arrive in early July, so Ciarlos made the arrange- 
ments at the Hollywood Roosevelt and then headed for Mexico for a 
few days. It was during this visit, he says, during this session smoking 
the Psilocybe mixture at Don Juan’s house that the Indian bent over him 
and explained softly that Carlos’s life had become too complicated. Don 
Juan urged him to rid himself of whatever cultural impediments were 
weighing him down. It seemed like hours there, floating in a grey limbo 
state of thoughtful calm, just sort of drifting around, and Carlos 
thought about school, the new book and C.J. and me. He understood 
the reason for Don Juan’s admonition; it was C.J. Carlos knew he’d have 


155 


156 I A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


to let go. The boy lived 3,000 miles away, but even if he didn't, Carlos 
understood very well that he could not coerce him into a certain 
lifestyle for which he had not chosen and was not prepared. Ihe rela 
tionship between the two of them had suffered over the last couple of 
years, primarily because Carlos was always promising to call and send 
presents and visit, but rarely did. The problem facing him was whether 
to make amends or just to let the boy go to live his own life without the 
intrusion of an unreliable father figure from 3,000 miles away who was 
too wrapped up in his field work. Even after CJ. and I arrived in Los 
Angeles, Carlos wasn't sure how well he and C.J. would get along. He 
was older now, seven years old, and taller, with blond hair falling down 
in bangs across his forehead. After a week, I flew back to Washington, 
but at Carlos' insistence, CJ. stayed behind for a second week 

CJ. stayed that week at Carlos’ house, a tan stucco home not far from 
the university. It had a flat roof with two arches out front and a fence on 
the right, the usual Spanish motif. Inside, there was a large living room 
with an adjoining dining room and kitchen, and two mattresses on the 
floor in the bedroom with blankets draped over the top. All the way 
down the hall and to the right was Carlos’s den, a sparse room with a 
wooden desk and a typewriter against one wall and a door outside to 
the backyard directly across the room. There was no telephone. When 
he or Nanny, a UCLA co-ed who stayed with him, wanted to make a 
call, they had to go to the public phone booth on the corner. 

Carlos had an aversion to telephones. Even back at LACC he didn’t 
want one in his apartment. Phones were expensise for one thing, and 
they were noisy. There was something in the ring, something that gave 
him a headache every time somebody called. Once, after a great deal of 
coercion, 1 talked him into getting a phone installed at his apartment on 
North New Hampshire. I even paid for it, but that didn’t work. A few 
weeks later, I found the phone in a closet wrapped with pillows and tied 
with rope. Carlos complained about the sound and said he didn't par- 
ticularly like talking on it anyway. It was like some kind of cultural icon 




157 I Spun In 1 


hidden there in the closet, disrupting things with an occasional muffled 
ring that Carlos just ignored. I shrugged; I reminded him this was the 
20th Century. I tried to call a few days later, but couldn't get through. 
The phone had been disconnected. 

During the week CJ. spent at Carlos’s, the two of them spent a cou- 
ple of days at UCLA and a few days hiking in the hills north of L.A. At 
night, they'd pick up Nanny at a dojo where she was taking karate and 
return to the house to talk and play Old Maid. Nanny read poetry to 
C.J. in bed each night, always Casey at the Bat, which was his favorite. 
Afterward, he'd lie there in the dark of the bedroom listening to Carlos 
in the den typing into the early morning hours, typing with a painful 
slowness on his new book. 

The visit was amicable enough. Carlos was on a health kick and so 
they ate steak and grapes and fresh vegetables. No candy or soft drinks 
were allowed in the house. Even after two weeks, CJ. was hesitant to talk 
with Carlos very much and he seemed a bit doubtful of all those stories 
about the brujos. A few years before, CJ. had been so influenced by 
Carlos that when he'd see a flock of crows at school, he would run home 
and tell me about them and about how that meant Kiki (Carlos) would 
be calling soon. Rut that influence was on the wane. Too many times 
Carlos hadn't called, even on those evenings when he told me he would, 
loo often he had failed to show up or write when he promised. Too 
many things had muddled the waters and there was no way Carlos was 
going to get his “chocho” back. On the way to the airport, Carlos prom 
ised to take CJ. to Europe, especially to Italy, and CJ. looked up and 
nodded, but there was this glimmer of doubt in his eyes. He was only 
seven, but he’d heard it all before. 




22 


Carlos's first book was selling quite well, especially on college campuses 
in the West, and Carlos started making the literary tours, collecting 
modest honorariums, talking in grey tones about cognitive dissonance 
and his own quirky view of phenomenology. He was interviewed by his- 
torian Theodore Roszak tor the BBC. Roszak was a fan and let Castaneda 
off easy on the question of Don luan's existence, saying at one point that 
the teachings demonstrated, “ a scaring conviction and a commanding 
eloquence that cannot but jar the most determined skeptic." Castaneda, 
sitting there at the microphone beside him, was much obliged. 

The second book, A Separate Reality, was in manuscript form by now 
and read more like a novel than Hie Teachings. There was not, for 
example, a division of labor in which Carlos tried to explain away the 
mysteries in a ponderous structural analysis. The critics generally had 
panned it away. When a Berkeley campus newspaper asked for an arti- 
cle, Carlos submitted part of a chapter from his new book and entitled 
it, “Death on a Gallop." There was nothing in Carlos’s contract that 
called for an option on a second book. Quebec read the manuscript and 
knew at once that Castaneda was moving away from the traditional aca- 
demic line that the University of California Press was designed to turn 
out. That's not to say the press wouldn't accept it. On the contrary, the 
prospect of a respectable bestseller that would carry the name of the 
University of California Press directly to the pages of The New York 



159 / Spun by Allegory 


Times Book Review and the New York Review of Books was something 
that had Quebec’s pulse running. But lie considered Carlos a friend, 
which is why he had sent him to Ned Brown. It was a move that simul 
tancously lost the press rights to the second Castaneda book, but won 
for Carlos more than a modicum of success, out away from the univer- 
sity. “I’m the one who set Carlos on the road to becoming a millionaire,” 
he'd tell friends. 



Photograph taken by Carlos Castaneda 





160 / A Magical Journey with Cjrlot OsUnedj 



Carlos Castaneda and Carlton Jeremy— 
an route to Saint Sophia's Montessori School, Santa Monica, California. 





161 / Spun b) 


The royalty checks from his first book, however, weren't exactly mak- 
ing him wealthy. He was still hard-pressed to help C.J. and me, but in 
December he started sending regular monthly checks, usually between 
S75 and S200. The big money was yet to come. By keeping the copyright 
for himself on the second book, he struck a better deal and suddenly his 
financial situation began looking up. He was considered a commodity, 
not ju$t a quirk who had somehow turned out a single book. Once Ned 
Brown got a look at the second manuscript, it was clear Carlos 
Castaneda was destined for better things. Alexander Tucker of 
Hollywood, one of the shrewdest moneymen around, a prince among 
Philistines, was hired to take care of Castaneda’s financial matters. 

As expected, A Separate Reality was a great success. In the introduc- 
tion, Carlos expanded on his I960 meeting with Don )uan. The book 
itself, however, covers a period from April 2, 1968, through December 
18, 1970, the so-called second cycle of Carlos’s apprenticeship. There 
are more mysteries of the shaman, more inside dope that only Carlos 
was coming up with. Some of the material was new, but much seemed 
to be an extension of old ideas; like how men of knowledge see other 
men as fibers of light, while seeing allies as dripping pieces of cloth, 
and how life is controlled folly and the individual will is an important 
link between humans and the world they choose to perceive. And 
there was more on death, which as every brujo knows, stands forever 
to the left, a few inches off the scapula, a forceful certainty that makes 
each act meaningful, because every act might be the last. There were 
in A Separate Reality repeated attempts by Carlos to see, episodes such 
as when he perceived Don )uan’s face as a glowing object and later 
when he saw a Mexican peasant whose face was a glowing coruscation 
of yellow light. 

In the final mindswimming afternoon of the book, Don )uan suc- 
ceeded in cracking Carlos’s desire to understand everything, rather 
than just let it flow over him waves of pure perception, straight to the 
memory bank. 




162 / A Magical tourney with Carlos Castaneda 


Don |uan recalled that Carlos had told him about an incident in 
which a friend, seeing a leaf falling from the top of a sycamore tree, 
declared that the same leaf could never fall from that same sycamore. 
He pointed to the tree on the other side of a gully with yellow leaves. 
After a few minutes, a single leaf cracked loose and tumbled to the 
ground, striking three branches before it hit. Don luan repeated that 
Carlos’s rational scheme of thinking would never allow the leaf to fall 
again — then suddenly, there it was, happening again! The same yellow 
desiccated leaf was tumbling exactly as before, three bounces and to the 
ground. It was like an instant television replay or something, and there 
was Carlos, not believing his eyes or his reason or his sense of cosmic 
order, not daring to think exactly what all this meant, just standing 
there watching another leaf fall, and then another, all falling the same 
way. They were all the same leaf from the same tree felling at different 
isolated points in time... there was no way this was possible! 

Then Don Genaro stepped in and did something truly extraordinary. 
He moved in a single second from Carlos's side to the top of the moun- 
tain miles away. He was here and then suddenly, over there, all in an 
electric instant. It was the most wrenching kind of hallucination in 
which the whole system of Aristotelian logic folds in of its own weight 
and the thin skin of logic is ripped away, exposing pure flowing percep- 
tion. It was the crack between the worlds and the sorcerer's plain, the 
bridge between the pit of demons; it was the Separate Reality, which was 
the other world of the Slipstream, or naked... flowing... perception. 

After ten years of field work, Carlos knew only that nothing was cer- 
tain. He knew that everything he understood about the real world was a 
product of his own intellectual manipulations. It was all a construction, 
learned from the moment of birth, and the only thing he was into was 
seeing it with new eyes. 





Douglas Sharon had come to UCLA after a few years of more-or-less 
freelance archaeology in Peru. He was a slender, boyish man with sandy- 
brown hair, a straight nose and the ingeniously enthusiastic look of a 
prep school freshman. Bored with his teachers and their scatter-gun 
approach to liberal education in high school, Sharon dropped out in 
I960 and headed to South America. In 1965, while working on the ruins 
of Chan Chan near the northern Peruvian community of Trujillo, 
Sharon met Eduardo Calderon, a local curamiero with an extraordinary 
knowledge of the ancient curing rituals. Eduardo invited him to partic- 
ipate in some of the sessions, but Sharon was too busy and didn’t get 
around to it before departing in 1967. Returning in the summer of 1970 
on a fellowship, Sharon participated in curing ceremonies and dis- 
cussed the essential nature of learning to “see” as the curanderos do. He 
spent hours taping Eduardo, and while the details sometimes differed, 
much of it was the same thing Carlos was getting from his informants. 
While Don |uan was teaching Carlos to “see" by using peyote, Eduardo 
was doing the same thing with San Pedro cactus. 

During the first year of Castaneda’s apprenticeship, he drank a clay 
mugful of Datura infusion and almost immediately his head rolled back 
and a blurry red spot swam before his eyes. Eor Sharon, it was the 
retuolino he saw, a whirlpool of red and yellow spinning in front of his 
eyes. Christopher Donnan, who taught a Peruvian archaeology class at 


163 



164 I A Magical lourncy with Carlos Caslancda 


UCLA, grasped the similarity right away and asked both Sharon and 
Carlos to speak to his class. 

“We were both doing shamanism, so Don nan thought it would be a 
good idea. It's no surprise, because shamanism wherever you find it has 
structural components that are very similar. The surface may vary 
according to cultures, just as languages vary, but when you start getting 
down to the psychological core, there is a tremendous amount of simi- 
larity. It’s no accident that there was all this similarity between what he 
was doing and what I was doing. 

“I believe in a straightforward, open, spcll-it-out no secrets kind of 
approach and so does Eduardo. It’s appropriate that he be my 
teacher. Personal history is a thing that he lived through. He was 14 
once, but he’s not anymore and he'll talk about it anytime you want. 
Yet it doesn't pin him down, because he lives his life as he sees fit and 
enjoys the company of his fellow human beings. That’s his personal- 
ity; that’s his way." 

Carlos and Sharon appeared again before on one of Chris Donnan's 
classes, each again outlining the basics of his shaman’s teachings. In 
December 1971, well after publication of Carlos’ second book and after 
Sharon's return from the Peruvian highlands, the two graduate students 
got together at the Co-op to discuss in detail the similarity of each 
other's work. Sharon had spent the previous months in the lagoons of 
northern Peru with Eduardo and a photographer for National 
Geographic. They were right up there at the top of everything, smack in 
the center of the primitive magical worldview, only a few hundred miles 
from (iarlos's hometown and the place of the Legendary Shaman. 
Sharon talked for a while and Carlos seemed genuinely interested, but 
after a while, it was Carlos's turn and he was off, as usual, with his anec- 
dotes, his stories and shaman's aperyus, his opinions on how to live an 
impeccable life. The spiel had new details, but Sharon had heard the 
tone before plenty of times. 




165 / Spun by Allegory 


A Separate Reality was riding high on bestseller lists and The 
Teachings had become something of a bible among the intellectuals and 
the attuned. Edward H. Spicer, a distinguished anthropologist from the 
University of Arizona, had written a glowing review of The Teachings 
for The American Anthropologist, although lie concluded that Don |uan 
bore absolutely no resemblance to Yaqui Indians he had studied for over 
two decades. Other magazines and newspapers began publishing arti- 
cles about Carlos, some favorable, but others, like Edmund Leach’s dev- 
astating piece in New York Review of Books, in which he ridiculed the 
book as great literary fiction but terrible anthropology. 

Whatever the case, Carlos was becoming quite famous, at least in 
certain circles. Hundreds of thousands of people on college campus all 
across the nation had read one or both of his books. He was getting let- 
ters and phone calls at the information desk of the department in 
Haines Hall. Simon and Schuster was hyping his second book like 
crazy and so when the black and red silk-screen posters w ith the crow’s 
wings and the silhouette of Don luan went up on bulletin boards in 
social science buildings amt the word got around — Castaneda is com- 
ing! well, there was a run on peyote and mescaline that had dealers 
scrambling south in vans trying for every border connection they 
could find. People were going out and actually eating )imson weed. 
Unbelievable! The campuses weren't just prepared for Castaneda’s 
visit, they were primed. 

At the University of Washington, you couldn’t even buy a copy of The 
Teachings the week before he made a lecture stop. There were students 
eating raw peyote and snorting mescaline through rolled $20 bills, try- 
ing to share in this thing that was happening, It was as if they thought 
maybe something phenomenal was going to happen when Castaneda 
walked into the auditorium, like maybe when he was standing there in 
front of them, not more than twenty feet away talking about relieving 
oneself of the despised pedestrian baggage of the real world and the rest 
of Don Juan’s philosophy, which was little more than a grand blur to 




166 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


most of them — when all of this was happening, maybe somehow in the 
middle of everything, the stage would suddenly break in two and the 
floor would buckle and the ceiling rumble, and they would be miracu 
lously privy even in their outrageously stoned condition to the Crack 
Between the Worlds! Who knows what wight happen! 

So everybody was there, not just the sociology and anthropology 
undergraduates and a scattering of professors, but the cognoscenti, the 
attuned on campus, the cool and ragged hip, the philosophy ma jors and 
biology students, all squatting on the floor near the front in filthy jeans 
or lounging back in the chairs or standing along the walls in the rear. 
Everybody was haunch to paunch waiting for Castaneda, everybody 
stroking the heads of Labrador retrievers and Huskies they had brought 
along, as was the custom. 

Finally, after all this waiting and anticipation, in came Carlos 
Castaneda wilh a couple of lackeys from the department. Only he didn't 
look like Castaneda, or rather like everybody’s ideal of Castaneda. He 
was short and slightly paunchy with glistening black hair trimmed 
short and a brown suit with white shirt and a narrow tan and cream tie. 
He had this dour sedentary look. Everybody looked at everybody else in 
stunned silence. This was the purveyor of the new mysticism — a guy 
who looked like a Cuban bellhop. 

“Hey, he doesn't look like a head to me,” one guy was say ing and 
everybody nodded. 

“Man, there is something wrong here," somebody else was saying. 
“This just can't be the same guy.” 

It wasn't that Carlos didn't look capable of the wacked-out visionary 
experiences of his books, but that he didn’t seem right for the real life 
legends about him, such as that he had mystical feet and that he always 
walked barefooted and never got calluses. And there was the story about 
how Castaneda was stoned all the time and had committed suicide in 
several places. It was quite a shock, therefore, when the real thing 
walked in looking like an ordinary businessman from downtown L.A. 




167 I Spun by Allegory 


He just stood at the microphone for a long time, surveying all the 
bobbing heads and looking out from those incredibly heavy-lidded eyes 
like maybe he was. . .seeing or something. Yes! He was seeing! And every 
body was thinking, so go ahead and lay it on us. Carlos! 

“Uhtmn." he mumbled into the microphone, squinting at the back of 
the room. “Can’t we get some of these dogs out of here?” 

As can be expected, everybody was taken aback. Carlos seemed suspi- 
ciously unattuned. And to make matters worse, his address was dry and 
unprofessional, all about membership and perception and socializa- 
tion. He had given more interesting monologues in Doug Sharon's 
office. It was much the same wherever he appeared, San Diego State and 
the University of California at Long Beach, everyplace. Always the shock 
of recognition, tentative acceptance, the professional lecture and the 
chilling conclusion that maybe Carlos Castaneda was not all that he was 
cracked up to he. 

But his books kept selling, even on campuses where he appeared in 
person, The phenomenon was too big for him to blow. For one thing, in 
the early 1970s Castaneda was just about the only God around. Even the 
disenchanted came to believe in his books, at least in some of the less 
abstruse points. And there was this curious minority out there who 
came to believe that the man they were seeing on college campuses was- 
n’t Carlos at all, but someone else. The real one was in hiding, an intense 
recluse. And then, of course, some people were saying how the suit and 
tie was an elaborate joke or some esoteric lesson, and so you had gath 
erings in student union cafeterias for days, trying to divine the message 
Castaneda was sending through his conventional appearance. 

Whatever the reasons, Oirlos Castaneda’s popularity was soaring. The 
students at the University of California at Irvine wanted him as a guest 
instructor. A certain number of faculty slots were set aside for visiting 
professorships, those whom the students wanted to come and teach. The 
money came from student fees, so students had a lot to say alxmt who 
was hired. In the spring quarter of 1972, it was Carlos Castaneda. 




168 / A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


He taught two classes on the Irvine campus, an undergraduate 
course and a graduate level seminar called, “Phenomenology of 
Shamanism.” Both were loosely based on his past work and his Ph.D. 
dissertation, something he’d been writing ever since finishing A 
Separate Reality. He called his dissertation Sorcery: A Description of the 
World and it became his third book, lourney to Ixtlan. 

Twelve people were actually enrolled for the seminar, but perhaps 
thirty were there on the first day, all crowded around the polyethylene 
tables and standing against the wall, all waiting for Castaneda. 

A fellow named Russ Rcuger got there early and took a seat at the 
table next to the podium. Russ was thinking that some of the real big 
gies on the faculty were here and kept running his hand through that 
frazzled mop of black Marty Allen hair as he looked all around the 
room. A doctoral candidate in sociology at UCI, Russ was looking for- 
ward to the Castaneda seminar. He had been pretty heavily into the 
drug scene himself, both in California and back home on Staten Island, 
where he grew up in a Jewish neighborhood. 

When Carlos walked in, there was the customary shock and hush as 
everybody just ogled him and let all those deliciously primitive 
thoughts of Don Juan rush through. It was difficult to relate all those 
famous anecdotes from the books with this little man. But there he 
was, a short nut-brown man with beige slacks, tan hiking shoes, a 
white short sleeve dress shirt open at the neck, looking every inch a 
Westwood burgher. 

Rosemary Lee, his teaching assistant at UCI, introduced Carlos to the 
class. After a brief course outline and a few words on the nature of phe- 
nomenology and membership, Castaneda got right down to it. 

“My apprenticeship is ended," he said. "There is nothing mom that 
Don Juan can leach me anymore. I have all the units of perception that 
the sorcerer needs to proceed by myself. The perceptual glosses can be 
Stopped, can be changed. Don Juan, you see, was concerned with giving 
me another description of the world, another way of seeing, another 




169 I Spun In 


reality. There is nothing else that he can tell me. But l must do it by 
myself now." 

During the next few class periods, Carlos explained that his last visit 
with Don Juan had been the previous May. While at Don Juan's house, 
he had watched Don Genaro perform more physical tricks. This time he 
lay on his belly on the floor and began moving his arms over the boards 
as if swimming, and slowly Genaro actually began gliding across the 
floor and around the room, smoothly, effortlessly, as if he were on a 
skateboard or something, a scant inch off terra firma. 

But the real gasper came later that afternoon, when Don Genaro 
made Carlos’s car disappear. The three of them, Carlos, Genaro and 
Don Juan, had been together all the time, but when Carlos stepped out 
onto the porch and looked out on the desert at the spot where he had 
parked his car, it was gone. He ran out trying to find it, but Don Juan 
and Genaro just joked between themselves on the porch. Finally. 
Genaro took off his floppy hat and tied a string to the brim and ran 
down a long hill, trailing his improvised kite around him. The kite 
made a slow loping sweep over the mountains and then suddenly took a 
turn for the ground and began falling. At the point when the kite struck 
the real world, Carlos’s car appeared. Or maybe, it had been there all the 
time. When Carlos ran down the hill to examine it, Genaro began 
screaming, He screamed for Carlos to forget the car, to forget the desert, 
forget everything and turn his attention to the crux of the matter, the 
real goods — stopping the world. 

Castaneda grinned at the class. “Two sorcerers who agree on the 
world can make a non-member share their view of reality, similar to the 
way that children are taught to view reality,” he said. “Sorcerers separate 
their bodily feelings, sort of kinetic communication, from reasoning." 

His undergraduate class was highly structured with tests and 
papers and formal lectures, but he decided to make the graduate sem- 
inar a loose flowing free-for-all. There wasn't even a textbook until 
halfway through the quarter and only then, when a few students, par- 




170 / A Magical journey with Cjrlos Castaneda 


ticularly Russ and Rosie Lee, got his dissertation and went upstairs to 
make copies on the thermofox. Some days Castaneda would just walk 
into the room and say, “Okay, put up your hands and ask questions." 
And everybody would begin asking about Don Juan, stopping the 
world and the Separate Reality. The first thing they asked about was 
the drugs and they were among the first to find out that Carlos didn’t 
use them anymore. 

“I used to think that psychotropic drugs were the important part,” he 
would say,”l no longer believe that. They were only an aid. Don Juan told 
me that everything he taught me was a means for stopping the world." 

He explained how peyote, mushrooms and Jimson weed were Don 
Juan’s dnigs, or more accurately, the drugs of his sorcery, and how the 
old man hadn't used them himself in years. The drugs were like a road 
map, he said, which leads you someplace, but isn’t the location itself. It 
was just part of the trip. Everyone carries around a description of the 
world like so much mental baggage stored deeply in the backbrain and 
this description is the product of a constant flow of interpretation. The 
real thing, the other world, is the same world — only it is altogether too 
oppressive and phantasmagorical and infinite, like William Blake’s 
doors of perception washed clean. Castaneda would start waving his 
arms all around, as if suddenly interrupting the flow of interpretation 
and he’d explain that only under such a condition can the Separate 
Reality slip through as pure mindswimming undifferentiated electric 
dendritic perception. 

But then, this was all so... intangible. So when Carlos noticed he was 
getting those dull bovine stares, as if everybody was wondering what the 
hell he was talking about and God knows what they were trying to 
understand — when this would happen, he’d fall back on some of his 
neat little didactic stories, such as when Genaro floated around the 
room on the invisible skateboard. 

He'd tell them about the time he met stoned Tim I-earv at a New York 
party and about the time he stumbled onto the remnants of a colony sup 




171 / Spun In A 


posed I y started by Leary in the 1960s. When the Mexican government 
started hassling I-cary's people and running them out of the country, a 
few stayed behind, hiding in the hills. So when Carlos found the house 
out there one afternoon, he naturally walked inside and, thinking he’d 
find a group of friendly Americans, said hell, and introduced himself. 

“They were zonked out. lTiere were twenty-five of them in a big room. 
Stoned." 1 fe'd stretch out his arms, as if to underscore the enormousness 
of the waste. “One little girl who almost smiled at me almost encouraged 
me. But she wouldn’t talk to me either. She lifted up her leg to scratch it. It 
was very hairy. 1 was shocked at what I saw there. Truly shocked. 

“I got up and left. Don luan came and we went into the mountains. 1 
told him about the Americans. Don luan told me that he had seen 
them, too. He thought them truly preposterous. He told me that he saw 
them in the fields eating the mushrooms directly." 

That, of course, was a bastardization of the Shamanic Way. One 
doesn’t just pluck up Psiloiybv mexicana and pop a couple into the 
mouth as if they were like so many toasted almonds. Meticulous prepa 
ration was required, lots of ritual and foresight, and just to eat them raw 
was tantamount to psychic death. Russ Rueger winced. He had done his 
share of mystical mushroom gobbling around I.os Angeles. 

“Don luan saw a naked American standing in the field, eating the 
mushrooms right there on the spot. He was horrified, l he mushrooms 
must lie picked with utmost care. They must Ik- stored in a gourd for a 
year and then mixed properly with other things. The ritual even includes 
the way you must handle them. You must take the mushroom in the left 
hand and transfer it to the right to place it in the gourd for storage. And 
there must be enormous concentration to find the right one. It is better 
to practice the Yaqui exercises than to use the psychotropics." 

He tried repeatedly throughout the course to relate the essence of his 
experience with that of his college students. Pointing to somebody’s 
watch, Carlos would say, “I’m nobody without my watch. It's my power 
object.” The student would look down at his wristwatch and think for a 




172 I A Magical lourney with Carlos Castaneda 


moment at this little profundity, this little classroom Castanedaism 
soaked through the corpus callosum, and he'd wonder what the hell 
Carlos was talking about and God knows, he was trying. 

"It's a matter of socialization." Everybody was staring blankly at 
Carlos. "It's not only a matter of suspending judgment, but also of 
intentionality, of not allowing the world to be made whole.” 

But of course! The old reducing valve. If one chose to crank open 
that mother and not limit the watch to merely a timepiece, it could be so 
much more. It was a matter of intentionality. Don Juan said everything 
could be used lor power and, by God, nothing was going to escape the 
nouveau shamanic gaze not the desert, not the classroom, not the 
wrist watch, not the freeway. 

“Coming down here on the freeway, I got this feeling on the top of 
my head. It had to do with straightening and collapsing the world.” 
Carlos said he got these feelings often. When he was on the San 
Diego Freeway, going underneath an overpass, it was as though the top 
of his VW bus made contact and he felt himself not only driving under 
neath but brushing underneath, making a connection, and in an instant 
he felt all the lines interconnecting in a kind of spider web Slipstream 
net. For one vertiginous instant, he was there, plugged in, his head mak- 
ing contact with the roof and the roof making contact with the under- 
pass and the underpass, that great concrete span, was seen suddenly for 
what it really was — one of the lines of the world stretching toward a 
million perspective points, infinitely. 

And just now, just as Carlos drives his tan VW minibus down the San 
Diego Freeway, somewhere around Westminster or Huntington Beach 
or someplace, just as he discerns that the overpass is one of the lines of 
the world, the whole thing collapses — highway, sky, rooftops, store- 
fronts — all folding in on itself, like a house of cards. 
h lapfla pflo pflapflapflapflapflap. 




173 / Spun by Allegory 


And for an instant, he is in the Separate Reality of Don Juan. The 
shackles of his cultural conditioning fall away from his eyes and 
he... sees. 

So it didn’t matter whether you were in the Sonoran desert or on the 
San Diego Freeway. It was all the same. 

Carlos warned his graduate student that LA. was hardly the ideal 
spot for a mitote. “The hunter makes use of the world as he sees fit. The 
sorcerer as hunter and warrior ventures into our reality only as far as he 
has to." 

There was that afternoon, he reminded them, that he and Don Juan 
were fifty miles front Los Angeles and heading into the city when, sud 
denly the old man shouted for him to stop the car and turn around. 
There were too many evil spirits or disconsolate vibrations or some- 
thing. Anyway, Don luan wasn't about to travel another mile north and 
so Carlos turned around and headed for Mexico. 





The basis of the classroom work was his newly completed Ph.D. disser- 
tation, which he read from and made references to and otherwise used 
to stimulate classroom discussion. A few weeks into the class, some stu 
dents started asking when they were going to get a copy. Carlos said at 
the beginning he’d have a dozen or so made, but he never did. finally, 
after several weeks, Russ and Rosie and another student went up to him 
after class and asked if they could have his copy of the dissertation to 
run off a few more, a couple of chapters at a time, on the thermofax 
upstairs. Carlos agreed and five weeks into the course, a nucleus of stu- 
dents began gathering on the sixth floor around a table adjacent to the 
office of Mary Rczig, who was the head of the department secretaries. 
They laid out the pages and made piles of each number and stapled 
them into about twenty full copies of Sorcery: A Description of the 
World The last 100 pages had to be duplicated on a Xerox photocopier 
because of a screw-up involving the thermofax, but finally, with just five 
weeks to go, everyone got a finished copy. It was all done two and three 
chapters at a time, because Castaneda wouldn’t give out any more than 
that. Rosie would take a couple of chapters and reproduce them and 
then return the originals before Carlos would agree to letting the stu- 
dents see the next few. 

Russ made two copies for himself, binding one in a green folder and 
the other in a brown folder, because he said these were Carlos's aura 


174 



175 / Spun by Allegory 


colors. Some of the other students thought he was nuts for saying that, 
but Russ saw the aura colors very dearly, just after Castaneda arrived 
on campus and moved into his temporary office in Room 724 of the 
social science tower. It all came to Russ suddenly, in the middle of a 
roaring psilocybin high while he and a friend were up on the seventh 
floor one day waiting for Carlos. The walls were undulating in a slow 
rhythmic bellydance pattern all the way up and down, like so much 
Kentucky Bluegrass in the wind. Russ and his friend slid down to the 
linoleum floor with their backs against the wall and just sat there wait- 
ing for him. 

And as they waited, the hallway became a glistening tube with lime 
lello walls stretching a million miles, a great Jello tube where, just now, 
Carlos Qistaneda was walking in that gingerly way he always walks — 
only there was a green coruscation from where the phosphorescent 
lights were crashing off his body. It was green and Russ noticed the aura 
alternately faded and swelled as he walked under the neon lights in the 
ceiling. Finally he was in front of them, fumbling with his office keys 
and looking out of the corner of his eye at these two guys on the floor. 
“Hello,” Carlos said, quickly opening the door. “Hey man, it’s a pleasure 
to see you," said Russ. Carlos gave a brief nod and just stood there in the 
middle of a crackling green mass of electric light. Then he scooted into 
his office and closed the door. In the classroom Carlos had seemed 
brown, but here in the hallway his green aura was the thing, and Russ 
understood that. 

Russ figured the brown aura had something to do with the power he 
had to tell the most fantastic story and get away with it. Carlos would 
say he had talked with a bilingual coyote or he would explain how he 
had seen Don Cenaro travel miles in a fraction of a second, and no mat- 
ter how far he went, no matter how ridiculous it sounded, nobody ever 
challenged him. What usually happened was that students struggled to 
understand what he was saying in terms that were more rational, which 
is exactly what Carlos didn't want to hear. They kept interpreting his 




176 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Caslancda 


experiences as hallucinations or as the result of hypnosis or suggestion. 
Carlos didn't want them to interpret them at all. The most skeptical stu- 
dent in the class was a guy who kept trying to drag Castaneda into das 
sical discussions of positivism and materialism. 

“Isn't Don Juan’s way destined to be replaced as are all imperfect and 
provisional systems resting on the primitive basis of theology?" And the 
guy would look across at Carlos with a fake earnestness. “Even the synthe- 
sis established by the old theocracies of Egypt and India was insufficient. 
It was based on subjective principles and could never embrace practical 
life. There are. after all, objective realities of the external world...” 

And Carlos would nod and say,“Uh huh, yes. Perhaps."”. ..because 
theocracy at the outset was limited to thought and feeling, right? The 
priests threw out polytheism and ultimately transformed it to 
monotheism, while the brujos stayed..." 

“...Perhaps. Uh huh. Well, maybe...” 

It would go on like that, sometimes for ten minutes before some- 
body would ask about one vision or another from the books or about 
lion Roberto's peyote ceremony back in 1964. There were usually 
questions about the allies, the shapeless forces that Carlos was always 
writing about and having to deal with on the desert, the powers inside 
the drugs. When Russ wasn't talking about the auras or about one of 
his friends who was a witch or otherwise on some occult tangent, he 
was talking about F.astcrn religions and the parallels with Don luan's 
system of beliefs. 

“The idea of seeing, for example," Russ said, “appears to be similar 
to the Zen idea of ‘satori'. Birth involve a profound illumination, a 
sort of penetration of the essence of things beyond all worldly 
description. And the lifestyle of the warrior has a number of similar- 
ities to that of the Zen-man. Both require disciplined detachment 
from worldly concerns and the realization that man’s affairs are ulti- 
mately of little significance. Both Zen and the philosophy of Don 




177 I Spun b\ .1 


Juan stress man's need to be in full harmony with nature. 1 mean, I 
can sec a lot of similarities here." 

And Carlos would nod again and say, “That’s interesting. leach me 
about that. Tell me what you know." 

“There are certain books on Eastern mysticism that contain striking 
analogies to some of the phenomena of the sorcerer's world. Like 
Fourteen lessons in Yogi Philosophy by Yogi Ramacharaka. It talks about 
egg shaped auras that surround people, bristles of light that extend 
from the body, astral bodies. They can be detached from their owner 
and powers that can be used to produce remarkable effects. You can 
find a lot of this in your books.” 

Carlos was always ready to consider feedback from the class. Some of 
Russ’s ideas were ridiculous, but the business about the East-West par- 
allels appealed to Carlos. It was as if it were totally new to him. 
Castaneda knew that American Indian sorcery could very well have 
started in .Asia. He knew and generally accepted the theory that Indians 
came from Asia across the Bering Strait, but he seemed surprisingly 
unaware of Eastern thought. 

One day, Castaneda explained to the class how he had tried to bring 
an ally into Professor Harold Garfinkel's living room up at Pacific 
Palisades. Garfinkel, a Jewish scholar in his fifties with credentials 
from Harvard and Berkeley, was primarily known for his great pon- 
derous discourses on phenomenology. He was a no-nonsense kind of 
teacher, a blue nose in academia. He found himself intrigued by 
Castaneda's research and guided him during the early days. The two of 
them went over to his house to talk. In the middle of an otherwise log- 
ical conversation, Carlos suddenly announced the ally was out on the 
porch. He asked if it would be all right to invite it inside. It was one of 
those classic scenes. 

“I want to show it to you,” Carlos said. 

“Oh, that's all right, Carlos," Garfinkel said, pulling back in the chair. 
“That’s fine. 1 believe that the ally’s here, so it’s all right." 




178 / A Magical lourncy with Carlos Castaneda 


Garfinkel's eyes were doing a fandango around the room, wondering 
what was going to happen next, wondering if maybe Carlos had lost it. 
That sometimes happens to anthropologists who become too deeply 
involved with alien cultures. They either become anaesthetized by the 
repeated cultural shocks of their work and begin seeing everything 
from a curious and uncommitted distance, or else, they seize on their 
research with a divine diligence — they go completely honkers. 

And so Garfinkel was a little worried that evening that maybe Carlos 
had gone over the edge. He had no intention of suspending his bour- 
geois sense of reason and allowing Castaneda to drag his ally into the 
living room. What would people down at Phenomenology Sociological 
Review say? Garfinkel looked at his old student with the most suspi- 
cious kind of clinical scrutiny. 

Castaneda shifted back and forth at the podium in an exuberant sway. 
If the incident at Garfinkel's had been an elaborately staged yoke, he did- 
n’t bother to explain. He was on new ground already — to kernel sor- 
cery — which he discussed in far greater detail than in any of his books. 

The ancient ritual calls for the sorcerer to steal forty-eight kernels of 
com from another sorcerer. T hey are placed in the path of someone 
who is to be killed, inside yellow (lowers preferably, hidden so that, 
when the victim steps on the flowers, a kernel of corn goes inside the 
foot and, so the brujos tell it, instantly kills him. 

“Don Juan will find a kernel for me," Carlos said. “A powerful sor- 
cerer will plant a kernel and grow it from one ear of corn. Don luan will 
select the kernels for me." 

After class, he drove back to l.os Angeles and called Ned Brown to talk 
about arrangements with Simon and Schuster for the publication of 
Journey lo Ixtlan. Then he called me to promise that a check was in the 
mail and to ask about how C.|. was doing. C.|. was doing quite well in 
school, but his teachers kept saying he had problems with the other stu- 
dents. C.J. had few friends. He was quiet and moody and serious about 
everything. I said he was just too mature for most of his classmates. 



179 I Spun b) I 


Later, back at home, Carlos lay back across the mattress and stared 
out the window. The conversation with me had depressed him, because 
it was himself he blamed for any problems CJ. had. The boy had no 
father; he had no name. 

To make it worse, he was telling his class about how he had no unfin- 
ished business. There was an irony in that. He stood there in class and 
actually told them, “I don’t have any unfinished business right now. I 
can go from here to eternity. There's nothing working for me, no unfin 
ished business, nothing to hold me back. That is being tight, which is 
the only way to be." God, what a line. Here he was, Carlos Castaneda, 
the man who proselytized against attachments, only he was as ensnared 
as all the rest of those middle-aged burghers he’d see all the time sitting 
there at Ships coffee shop on VVilshire Boulevard. They were always 
there, the burghers, always jammed into the booths with wives and kids, 
dealing with mortgages, marriage and children. It was the grimmest 
sort of responsibility. And here was Carlos Castaneda sitting there, a 
Master Charge card in his wallet and an apartment in Westwood and a 
teaching job. 

And yet, there were times he felt there was something more, some 
thing transcendent — his name for one thing. His name was magic. 
When he said something at Irvine about starting an institute for the 
study of hermeneutics, everybody listened. In restaurants, people asked 
for his autograph. Sally Kempton came to town saying she was going to 
do a piece on him for Expire. His agent was dickering with Time maga- 
zine about a cover story. There was this tantalizing electricity. He wasn't 
just some musky professor or half-baked novelist, he was something 
more, something special, he was... Castaneda. 

In the early spring of 1 972, a producer of the Dick Given Slww asked 
if Carlos would make an appearance. 

It was the quintessential credential, but he turned it down. Carlos 
was worried he'd be treated like a clown. He knew what a superficial fif- 
teen-minute discussion of his experiences with Don |uan would sound 




180 / A Mjnic.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


like to the folks at home. And there was another reason he didn't want 
to appear on the Dick Ct tvett Slum: There was a certain power and free- 
dom in remaining inaccessible. Ned Brown had pressed him into inter 
views before his second book and was doing the same thing for the 
upcoming work. Jo urncy to Ixtlan, but those were with magazines and 
newspapers, not network television. He was no gadfly and didn't want 
to risk appearing like one. The sorcerer's explanation, the dramatic con- 
clusion of the Don |uan saga, was still over a year away and would 
appear in his fourth book. There were still some things to shake into 
place, so it seemed wise to avoid a potentially dangerous and embar- 
rassing situation on nationwide television with a brash young elitist like 
Dick Cavett, who might try to pick holes in his Separate Reality. 

Toward the end of the seminar, Castaneda moved farther away from 
the material in his books and into whole new areas of sorcery that 
nobody in class had ever heard of: the Four Winds, for example. He said 
they were women whom the sorcerer must not deliberately seek, but 
who would come and help in the final battle on the plain with the ally. 
They were to accompany the apprentice during the ceremony when he 
is finally recognized as a brujo. lb the north, there is his shield, his pro 
lector. In the back of him, to the south, is the warm wind, the joker. The 
joker represents the warmth and lightness of spring. Her presence mod- 
erates the devastating north wind. To the west, introspection is repre- 
sented by the spirit catcher. Completing the array is the weapon, to the 
east. The weapon is the “foremost authority” and sometimes is called 
the wind of illumination. 

Castaneda told his class these four women are used to blunt the 
attack of the ally when they all finally meet on the plain, somewhere in 
Sonora. It's sort of like a strange macabre ballet. The ally attacks the 
women one by one until finally, he comes eyeball-to-eyeball witli the 
apprentice himself. If the apprentice can grab the ally and slam him to 
the ground, he gains the ally's power. But if he loses, the apprentice is 
spun, literally twirled into the air at great speed. For Don Genaro, it 




181 / Spun b) A 


meant losing a part of his humanity. He could never go back home. His 
journey, his metaphorical return to Ixtlan, will last forever. 

Most people in the class were vaguely aware that Carlos was speaking 
metaphorically here, that this whole thing with the Winds and the ally 
was a broad allegory to explain an apprentice’s finally becoming a 
shaman — but it was still awfully murky. 

“Since I don't have Four Winds," Carlos said, “I’ll have to take the 
plunge by myself. I’ll do it when my body feels like it." 

There was a rumor on the Irvine campus for a while that Rosie had 
found a Wind for him, some freewheeling co-ed willing to become part 
of his psychodrama, but nothing ever came of it. And the class ended, 
he had yet to make the plunge. He was not yet a shaman and, further- 
more, was a bit unsure exactly how it would all end. 

There was no term paper at the end of the graduate seminar, 
although he asked everybody to return copies of his dissertation with 
notes written in the margins, suggestions, ideas, criticisms, whatever. 

The final class period was held high in the hills north of Los Angeles, 
a spot Carlos called a place of power, where Yaqui sorcerers once had 
come to practice meditation and other shamanic rituals. He said it was 
a location that Don Juan had seen in one of his dreams, a huge ring of 
boulders arranged in a circle around a dense forest of chaparral, high 
above the Malibu Canyon. Everybody met at Ships coffee shop. Russ 
was there with Rosie, and lohn Wallace and his wife Ruth were there. 
Wallace, although not enrolled, had attended Carlos’s graduate class 
several times. A philosophy major was there babbling on about Spinoza 
or something and there were a couple of trippy Sufi characters and 
most of the others from the class. 

There were two caravans, one led by Carlos in his tan VW minibus 
and another led by somebody else in a van who seemed to know the way. 
Everybody headed up the Ventura Freeway and then turned onto Las 
Virgenes Road toward Malibu and the circle of boulders. When they got 
there, Carlos hopped up in front of everyone and began demonstrating 




182 ! A Mapic.il journey with Carlos Castaneda 


some exercises, some of the techniques of Yaqui sorcery, such as coming 
in contact with the lines of the world. Everybody gathered around him. 
Carlos stood with his feet at a right angle, his left arm extended and his 
right arm parallel to the ground and bent inward toward his chest. He 
turned his left palm toward the back and his right palm toward the front. 
Then the fingers on each hand began moving wildly as if they were 
plucking a giant banjo. Carlos made fists and turned himself around 
gracefully into a prizefighter’s stance. 

He stood there tense and locked, his arms out and legs bent in his 
determined crouch, stony eyed. And suddenly, there they were... the 
lines of the world! The net, the web, the cosmic interstitial flow! 

“Pop," Carlos yelled, falling back into a relaxed position. “There they 
are. The lines of the world." 

Everyone tried it, plucking the giant banjo there under the May 
California sun. Everybody was crouched at the foot of a boulder that 
looked like a huge skull and they were just letting it flow, looking 
for... and God knows what they were looking for. 

Carlos went to the center of the chaparral forest and explained how 
the old sorcerers used to bury themselves by taking bits and pieces of 
manzanita and mesquite and building small tombs. It was a technique 
for stopping the world. The brujos would just stretch out for days under 
the vegetation, until everything just came to a halt — the internal dia- 
logue. the ordinary perception of things, the active lifestyle. They’d just 
lie there silently, until the whole hulking universe came creeping to a 
halt and they would see. Nobody got a chance to try out the mesquite 
death; Carlos was already discussing how to survive in the desert by eat- 
ing rattlesnake meat. 

“Stupendous," he shouted. “Truly stupendous. Better than whale, 
turkey, chicken. What you need to trap rattlesnakes is string, lots of 
string. The trapping is done like this," he said, dangling a length of 
string made into a loop which he said was slipped over a snake's head 
w hen it came out of its hole. 




183 / Spun bi .1 


"Actually, dental floss is the best thing to use. Anthropologists 
don't need all that junk they take into the field with them. All they 
need is dental floss, lots of dental floss. You could survive anywhere 
with dental floss.” 

Everybody followed Carlos down into the thick vegetation below, 
stopping occasionally to listen to one of his dissertations. He told the 
students to back into their cars and follow him down through Malibu 
Canyon in search of a water canyon where he said angelica grew. It was 
supposedly a favorite plant of the Yaqui sorcerers, which was burned to 
produce a smoke that was inhaled lor clarity. The group trundled down 
into a creek bed, ignoring the sign that warned: “No Trespassing. Los 
Angeles Water District $500.00 fine and/or imprisonment for viola- 
tors." There were a few strands of green iirigelicn growing out of the 
creek bed, but they hadn’t been dried, naturally. 

“It is no good," Carlos said. "It must be dry before you pick it.” 

|ohn Wallace reached down and snapped off a strand and sniffed it. 
The plant had a familiar fragrance. Wallace took a bite. “Carlos," he said. 
“This is wild celery." 

Carlos grinned. “Of course, wild celery. It’s good, isn’t it? Angelica is 
amazing. I took it to a famous botanist at UCI A for analysis. He fold me 
there is nothing to it. Nothing. Perfectly innocuous stuff. You could eat 
ten pounds of it and nothing would happen. But it is important to the 
sorcerer. He insists that its smoke will produce great clarity." 

Wallace and his wife were supposed to meet some friends at the Los 
Angeles International Airport and so they left everybody at the water 
canyon. The trip was a nightmare. While driving through Venice, Ruth 
got violently ill. Wallace took a wrong turn and ended up getting a traf 
fic citation for driving on the Venice Boardwalk. They finally got to the 
airport and met their friends. As they pulled out, a rain storm broke 
over Los Angeles, the windshield wiper motor burned out and Wallace 
was forced to get home to Laguna Beach very slowly, creeping along 
U.S. Highway No. 1 at midnight, sticking his left arm out the window to 




184 / A Magical journey wilh Carlos Castaneda 


clear a tiny patch in the windshield. They were nearly home before Ruth 
noticed the twig that somehow had gotten inside her jacket. Carlos had 
warned everyone not to take anything away from the place of power. 

“But I didn't take it,” Ruth protested. “It must have jumped into 
my pocket." 

“I don’t care how it got there, throw the goddamned thing out the 
window," complained John. “Right now!" 

That's not to say that Ruth and John Wallace were total freaked out 
loonies or anything. They were not. But they were impressionable, 
extremely susceptible to suggestion. So when Carlos passed on one of 
his slightly mystifying admonitions like, “Don't take anything away 
from the place of power," they took him seriously. 

Russ Rueger took him seriously too — when he saw the jackrabbit in 
the parking lot, it seemed like so much more than just coincidence. Russ 
was peddling his bicycle back to his apartment from the social science 
tower, a mile away. He was peddling along through the parking lots and 
the blacktop roadways on campus when, without any warning, a gar 
gantuan jack rabbit lurched into the road right in front of Russ's bike. 
Suddenly, out of the shadows that the moon made with the palmettos, a 
great hulking black-eyed rabbit was staring straight at Russ with an 
imperious midnight gaze. Russ was so startled, he fell off his bike. He 
just lay there on the road with his eyes closed, not daring to think about 
the monster rabbit that was just a few feet away. He tried not to think of 
anything, but his mind kept returning to how Carlos had played with 
the dog with the glistening mane and had talked with the coyote. An ally 
could appear at any time, in any form. Russ rolled his head slowly 
toward the rabbit, which looked at him curiously. It was just the two of 
them, Russ and the monster jackrabbit, locked in something strange 
under the blue-rimmed California sky. Locked ... pluggeil in.. .a single 
sentient mind under God's own ozone. 

Suddenly, the rabbit turned and bounded off. Russ lost it in the bush 
so he just lay there, staring off aimlessly into the night. He had never 




185 I Spun bi .1 


fallen off his bicycle before, at least not since his boyhood days back on 
Staten Island where he learned to ride. But the rabbit had so jangled his 
senses that he fell off his bicycle. That was the kind of thing he'd find in 
Carlos’s world, not his own — crazy Carlos's world, where there were 
allies and omens and the biggest damn jackrabbiis in the cosmic nexus. 
Russ knew somehow he had entered the world of Carlos Castaneda 
right here in the middle of the night on the UCI campus. 

But then, naturally, this was the kind of thing that always happened. 
You couldn't talk with Carlos's students or friends or acquaintances or 
even those who'd only read his books without hearing all these stories. 
There were people everywhere who had experienced something 
extraordinary, something totally outside the parameters of pure 
Aristotelian logic. 

Linda Cornett, an old friend of mine who had read Carlos's books 
religiously, had an autographed copy of Journey to Ixtlan, which she 
kept on the table, next to her bed. And one day her daughter, Paula, also 
a Castaneda devotee, walked into the bedroom and there on the book 
was a huge crow perched calmly in the sun. The crow apparently had 
flown in through an open window and had come to light on the book. 
There was no way to keep from thinking of the strange irony in all 
this — a crow on a book by Carlos Castaneda. 

Paula just let her jaw drop in a kind of curious amazement. Then she 
noticed something wrapped around its right leg. She took a step closer 
and saw it was a copper band embossed with what appeared to be little 
Aztec symbols. What an omen! What a scene in the real world! The dull 
burghers might think they could explain it all away, but Paula and Linda 
were both attuned and they saw the magic operating. 

But that was parlor stuff compared with John Wallace's dream, lust 
after Wallace met Carlos on campus at UCI in the spring of 1972, he 
noticed there was a feeling of expectation all around. It was in the air. 
People expected things to happen, Wallace included, so one night he 
was up late writing music in his living room, which overlooks the 




186 / A Magical lourney with Carlos Castaneda 


Pacific high up in the Laguna Hills. He was sitting at the baby grand 
piano in the corner making up these lazy melodies until he got tired and 
decided to go over and lie down on the couch for awhile in front of the 
fireplace. The night sky through the window had that surreal chocolate 
marble swirl look to it and as Wallace lay there watching it. he suddenly 
became very frightened. He experienced a sudden plunging ethereal 
chill. It was frightening and he got up and went into the bedroom and 
lay down beside his wife. 

The instant he lay down, things began happening. Twigs began 
breaking outside, the wind blew more strongly and the basement door 
suddenly began slamming against the frame. At first, it seemed like a 
sudden squall, but it kept building and climbing in a furious howling 
intensity, until whole branches were crashing down on top of the house. 
The wind was shrieking wildly and the basement door was exploding in 
a violent spray of splinters. It was as if half of Laguna Hills was about to 
be hurled out over the ocean. 

A hill sweat stood on Wallace’s forehead. This crazy business was 
suddenly getting quite serious. He dared not move, but looked franti- 
cally around the room for the first signs of windows breaking and the 
howling of this nightstorm through his bedroom. The more Wallace 
tried to get control of things, the worse it got. Finally, he resigned 
himself to being sucked out over the Pacific in a vile apocalyptic rush, 
and just as he thought it, everything stopped. There was suddenly a 
vast perfect calm! 

He lay there breathing hoarsely with a corona of sweat on the pil- 
low, wondering what the hell had happened, lust about the time he 
concluded it was some kind of strange hallucination, he heard Ruth’s 
voice. “It's all quiet now," she whispered. Then she rolled over and fell 
back asleep. 

She’d heard! Or had she? Was that just part of his dream, his own 
peculiar Separate Reality? What kind of hall of mirrors was he in? 



187 / Spun by Allegory 


Visions, dreams, hallucinations, soaring goof- ball nightmares, just them 
ami Carlos and the vastness, plugged in... floating in the crack between the 
worlds. Nobody was immune if they wanted to believe in Castaneda. 

Adam Smith, the writer, ran into Carlos’s double one day in New York. 
Wanting to meet Castaneda, Smith hustled over to Simon and Schuster's 
New York office and began climbing the stairs because he understood that 
Carlos avoided elevators. A couple of flights up, Smith ran into somebody 
who looked like he might be Castaneda, a short dark man, and he 
attempted to strike up a conversation about Carlos's terrific contribution 
to anthropology and how his books were not just like reading about an 
experience, but actually living it; all the time Carlos was nodding and 
descending the stairs at a quick pace. Smith tried Wittgenstein, but that 
didn't work either. Near the bottom of the stairwell, down almost at the 
lobby. Smith had a sudden flash of insight, He had just read about how 
Don Juan taught his apprentice the most difficult feat of all — to make a 
double of yourself. It was a strange and ancient relativist concept, this 
business of creating a duplicate, so Smith asked the man half-jokingly if 
he actually was Carlos Castaneda'-s double. 

The man stopped. He nodded and said yes. Then a broad grin broke 
across his face and he walked out into the lobby and disappeared into 
the crowd. 

This business of having a sanctioned double was something Carlos 
had been thinking about for years. Even before writing about it in his 
fourth book. Tales of Power, Castaneda was playing these little psycho 
logical tricks on people. 

During February of 1973, Carlos traveled to New York to talk with 
his publisher about Tales of Power and invited me to join him there for a 
few days. I hadn't seen Carlos in years and it surprised me to see he had 
put on a little weight under that dark suit and topcoat. Otherwise, he 
was much the same — the same broad grin, the same black rain hat, the 
same charming patter. 




188 / A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


We took a cab to the Drake Hotel and ate dinner downstairs, steak 
for both of us, but while I had wine, Carlos had hot tea — no cocktail, 
nor wine or alcohol of any kind, I wanted to talk about lourney to 
lx t Ian, which I had just finished, but Carlos refused. He just kept mov- 
ing from one idea to another in a nervous, fidgety way. After we got 
back upstairs to the room, Carlos kept roaming around, peering out the 
window, then walking over to the door, then rummaging in one of his 
suitcases. I sat bewildered in the corner in a splashy flower print arch 
back chair. I watched his agitation with a quiet exasperation. 

Carlos took a silver pen and pencil set and a lew foreign coins out of 
the suitcase and gave them to me. He wanted C.J. to have them. Then he 
reached down and grabbed a raggedy suitcase and thrust it toward me, 
apologizing that a friends dog had chewed the edge. He wanted his 
“chocho” to have that, too. 

I decided to take a shower. When 1 finished, he was still there, hop- 
ping around between the beds and talking on the telephone. And he 
kept talking into the night, dialing different people in the United States 
and Mexico, talking to a professor somewhere in California and then to 
his editor, Michael Hamer, across town. Sometimes he talked in 
English, sometimes in Spanish, just roaming then- at the end of the cord 
in a kind of amniotic drift. As 1 slipped off to sleep, he was dialing 
Oaxaca or someplace. 

The next day it was worse. Carlos became quite dictatorial, ordering 
me all around, and so finally I announced that I was getting a room at 
the Commodore. I packed and marched out of the room and climbed 
aboard the elevator. Carlos followed me and as we descended, he 
directed me to be sure C.|. was getting a good education and was seeing 
a dentist regularly. He admonished me for allowing C.J. to ride a motor- 
cycle in competition on dirt tracks around West Virginia. He went on 
like that all the way down to the lobby until I couldn't take it any longer. 
“Okay, Napoleon! Okay!" I retorted. He gave me a 55,000 cashier's 
check for C.J., unsigned. 




189 / Spun In A 


Carlos raised his palms submissively. “Look, I’d like to see my ‘cho- 
cho’ very soon. Maybe he can come to California or maybe I can take 
him for a few weeks to South America.” I nodded absent mindedly. 
"And tell him Napoleon says hello." 

When 1 got back home to Charleston, West Virginia, I filed for 
divorce, something that I had meant to do for years. There had been a 
feeling we could work things out and get back together, but the weekend 
in New York proved it was hopeless. I didn’t like this matter of not 
knowing if I was legally married and so I decided to cut it off for good. 
It wasn't until October that I heard from Carlos, who said he was con- 
fused by the notice of divorce. I complained about his strange attitude 
and behavior in New York. 

There was a long silence as if Carlos had left the phone or something. 
Finally, he asked me to repeat all that about his attitude in New York, 
which I did. Carlos listened and then solemnly confessed that he was 
quite confused. 

“I wasn't in New York at the Drake Hotel in February," he said. “I 
didn’t see you there then." 

I was in no mood for this. “Well, I know I was in New York and I 
spent the night with somebody who looked like you, but as I say, you 
certainly didn’t act like the Carlos I used to know." 

“No, I'm serious, Maggie. I was not in New York in February." He 
sounded deadly serious. 

I thought for a moment and wondered why he would lie about some- 
thing like this. Somebody was there, that’s for sure. What kind of bizarre 
schizophrenia was I dealing with here anyway? And then suddenly, it 
dawned on me — what a magnificent new level he had slipped on every 
body. What a marvelous new twist. 

It wasn't just a matter of meeting the mysterious Mr. Castaneda any- 
more, of catching him in a restaurant or on the telephone or something. 
No, from now on, there was a new quirk in the apparatus. Even if one 
caught Carlos somewhere and managed to talk to him at length, which 




190 / A Magical Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


was difficult enough, there was no absolute certainty that it was really 
Carlos at all. There were a couple of them running around now, dupli- 
cates, doubles, making the real thing more inaccessible than ever. Mr. 
Metaphysical! He had pulled out the rug again! 





There is always the flapping of the crow's wings, his GJ., that brings 
Carlos back to the insipid burgher’s world. Carlos has been struggling 
to let the boy go. But he was also writing about the Indians who were 
really out there in their boots and bolo ties, squinting out from those 
marvelously wrinkled eyesockets like a full-color spread in National 
Geographic. They really had those curiously syncretic beliefs which 
Carlos had to conic to know and understand, at least to some degree. It 
was all there, and in the beginning Carlos Castaneda was rather careful 
to get it down accurately. Of course, he’d always interjected a lot of him- 
self into his books, and the truth is, they were never pure anthropology 
and were never supposed to be. After all, hadn’t Walter Goldschmidt, 
the resident god at UCLA, described The Teachings as both ethnography 
and allegory in his glowing foreword to the book? Hadn't the old man 
come right out and said...(j//cgury...as if to say Carlos was blending cer- 
tain levels here. 


191 



192 I A Magical Journey with Cjrlos Castaneda 



Carlton Jeremy Castaneda (C.J., "Choc Iso") with Carlos 
in New York, 1968 




193 / Spun by Allegory 



Carlos and Carlton Jeremy at my apartment — 

5315 W. 8th Street. Los Angeles. California. 1964 

So it wasn't a secret that some of the material in Carlos’s hooks was 
absolutely real world feet, while some was, admittedly, a bit more sub- 
jective. What Carlos had been doing front the beginning was weaving 
these little stories, these apenjus, the real desert experiences and dreams 
the honest dialogue of a dozen informants — weaving all this together 
with the details of his rather mundane I .os Angeles lifestyle. He had 
written about C.|. from the beginning — had dedicated the book to him, 
in fact — and so when it finally dawned on him that he’d have to quit 
doting on the boy, he began thinking of the separation in metaphorical 
terms. It became an obsession with him; it plagued his dreams, When 




194 / A Magical Journey wilh Carlos Castaneda 


he finally sat down to complete Tales of Power, it dominated the mes- 
sage. The break with C.J. became essential in what he was calling his 
transformation from apprentice to man of knowledge. 

Nobody ever mentioned that in the magazine articles that were 
appearing everywhere. The big issue was whether Castaneda's books 
were legitimate, a controversy that raged for months in the media. 
When Paul Ricsman. an anthropologist from Carleton College, wrote a 
favorable review of all three books for the New York Times Book Review, 
novelist Joyce Carol Oates wrote a letter impugning Castaneda' s work 
as too slick and too perfectly constructed to be real. He had brought an 
order and novelistic momentum and flawless dialogue to the real world 
and Ms. Oates was suspicious. 

One of the first really long magazine pieces was John Wallace's article 
in Penthouse, a long account of Carlos's teaching at UC1 based on class- 
room notes and the thermofax of the dissertation that Rosie, Russ and 
the others had assembled. When Psychology Today wanted to publish a 
conversation wilh Castaneda, he broke a long-standing rule by allowing 
Sam Keen to tape a discussion about Don Juan, shamanism and 
phenomenology. On the recommendation of Ned Brown, Carlos 
granted a few interviews immediately prior to publication of Journey to 
Ixtlan. Suddenly he was everywhere — Harper's, the New York Times, 
Rolling Stone, the Village Voice; suddenly there were dozens of articles, 
reviews, conversations and opinions on the dean of the new mysticism. 
But they all had the same failing; they all took Castaneda at his word 
and so the apocrypha just became part of the mythology. 

When a Time magazine reporter started asking questions about 
Cesar and Susana, Peru and other elements of his background, Carlos 
knew the game was up. A search by a Time reporter in Peru had turned 
up the Aranas living in Lima. They hadn't heard from Cjrlos in years 
and were somewhat surprised to learn of his success in the states. Cesar 
had given the reporter a photo of Carlos, the graduation picture at 
LACC which the family had received in a letter sent home thirteen years 



195 / Spun fr.i .1 


before. So the magazine had some proof that conflicted with the 
Castaneda scenario of life in Brazil among the aunts and the intellectu- 
als. They had the real goods and Carlos knew it. It was the grimmest of 
omens for one who has erased his personal history and so, sitting there 
with a woman reporter from Time high above Malibu in the place of the 
sorcerers, Carlos Castaneda grinned and looked out at the Pacific and 
waxed ethereal. 

“To ask me to verify my life by giving you my statistics, is like using 
science to validate sorcery,’ he said. “It robs the world of its magic and 
makes milestones of us all." 

The Castaneda cover story appeared in the March 5, 1973 issue of 
Time magazine. Following these pages of background, the article 
quoted critics and supporters who each had their own ideas about the 
existence of L>on )uan and the validity of Carlos's work. It recounted 
his own vague story of living in Brazil and Argentina and then 
Hollywood. Using immigration records, school documents and infor- 
mation with the Aranas, the magazine revealed that the real Carlos 
Castaneda was born on Christmas Day, 1925 not in Brazil, but in Peru, 
under slightly humbler circumstances and that his education had been 
in Cajamarca and Lima, not Brazil and Italy. The article caused quite a 
stir around UCLA. 

“I know this is easy to say after the fact, but the first time 1 met Carlos 
and after he told me he was originally from Brazil and then to Italy and 
then went to Argentina and then to the states, there was some kind of 
buzz I was getting all along in terms of his mannerisms that kept saying 
to me ‘Peru’ and I didn't know why," Doug Sharon says. “And 1 used to 
say that’s because he's a Latin American and Latin Americans have a lot 
of things in common. But when the Time magazine article came out it 
surprised me, but then 1 sat down and began to think about it. 1 began 
to say this buzz was right after all." 

Shortly after the article appeared, |im Quebec bumped into Carlos 
and his girlfriend Nanny, on campus. Carlos seemed to be quite 




196 / A Mjnit.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


embarrassed at the turn the controversy had taken. Nanny was as out- 
going as always and jabbered on about how she intended to switch 
majors from sociology to journalism, something she had talked about 
before but which, under the circumstances, was particularly curious. 
Here was Carlos Castaneda, standing quietly, grinning sheepishly and 
looking down at his shoes — while Nanny went on and on about a dis- 
cipline that threatened to destroy Carlos’s already limited credibility. 
It was amusing to watch him squirming there. Clearly, he didn’t want 
to talk about the magazine piece, but Quebec didn’t mind. Quebec 
had long developed a tolerant indifference to the absolute truth of 
Carlos’s stories. The revelation that Carlos was not from Brazil, but 
Peru, was no big shock. Quebec had suspected something ever since 
returning from Peru one summer and, knowing Carlos was from 
South America, asked for a little help with his Portuguese. Carlos 
vehemently refused. He pul his hands to his ear and said it was a lan- 
guage he didn’t like to hear. 

That was strange. True Brazilians speak Portuguese. The language 
they don’t like to hear is Spanish, which what Carlos spoke all the time. 
The Time article helped clear up the inconsistencies, 

“He didn’t want to talk about Brazil, because he didn't know any- 
thing about it," says Quebec, “and he didn’t want to talk about Peru, 
because he knew too much.” 

Parodies of Castaneda began appearing in New York magazines and 
newspapers. The Great Tear was back at Haines Hall and a raging debate 
was underway among academicians and critics and friends who all had 
their own special understanding of what Castaneda was about. 

The people writing letters to the New York Times Book Review seemed 
to want to crucify him out on the Sonoran plain, Joyce Carol Oates was 
openly calling his books a hoax. Old colleagues around UCLA were 
looking at him suspiciously, 

Hoax. Con artist. My God, what was he into? Carlos granted no more 
interviews for awhile and limited his visits on campus to appearances 




197 I Spun by Allegory 


aimed at getting his Ph.D. He selected Meighan, Garfinkel, Dr. Philip 
Newman and two others to be his doctoral committee. There was a 
whole set of requirements he had to meet, written exams and oral 
exams and so forth. Much of the tedious preliminary material, the lan- 
guage proficiency requirement, was taken care of well before the Time 
cover story hit the stands. When Meighan had asked him what language 
he spoke as a child — he had lived in Brazil and had spoken Italian, pick- 
ing up Portuguese and Spanish along the way. It was a bureaucratic 
question — not a personal one — so when Carlos passed the language 
examination, Meighan was satisfied. He didn't really care how Carlos 
came to learn the languages, only that he knew them. 

The written examination was standard anthropology, straight line 
scholarship of the conventional Goldschmidt variety, and he passed 
that with no problems. His dissertation was his third book, edited 
slightly, but not significantly, from the volume that took its place as 
the third installment of the Don Juan saga. Through it all, as The Great 
Fear rose up that spring 1973, Meighan remained his staunchest ally 
on the committee. 

Meighan, who was something of an odd man out because his dis 
cipline was archaeology and not the more exquisite realm of eth- 
nomethodological anthropology — only crusty old Clement Meighan 
remained loyally at Carlos’s side, He frequently was called in to 
defend the whole Don Juan business from the broadsides of more 
skeptical colleagues. 

That spring, as it became widely known that Carlos was about to get 
his Ph.D., a disgruntled clique mounted something of an attack on a 
body of work some felt was as close to true anthropology as Asimov’s 
sci-fi articles were to conventional science. The general consensus up 
there in the lounge in Haines Hall was that Castaneda ought to be 
thrown to the boorish mob, the young elite with their fashionably half- 
baked ideas about cultural anthropology. You'd have these old guys with 
fifteen years in the late pre-Cambrian substrata sitting around the table 




198 / A Mjnic.il Journey with Carlos Castaneda 


and debaling whether Carlos Castaneda had made any real academic 
progress. They'd suck in their chin and say how Carlos's work was tilled 
with all these problems concerning methodology and the impossibility 
of accurate duplication. They'd sit around the yellow polyvinyl tables 
and question the subjective aspect of Carlos’s work in which he had 
gone back to the 1930s idea of asserting a humanistic trend in anthro- 
pology. In the late 1950s, the social sciences in general, and anthropol- 
ogy in particular, had moved toward a quantitative form of analysis, 
which was generally considered progressive and respectable. Social 
sciences would never achieve the precision of chemistry or physics, but 
with the increasing use of testing and statistical analysis, they were 
approaching what some scholars felt to be reality. The idea was to get 
into the little black box of the brain and the tool had become numbers 
and chi-square analysis. 

And just as everybody was adapting to that, here was Carlos 
Castaneda with a tremendous following and influence wrecking 
everything, sending the pendulum sailing back into the soft-headed 
humanism of the 1930s. Moreover, he was doing it with such style, 
such elan. He had become so. . .popular. . .and so naturally some of the 
old farts were complaining about what a madhouse Haines Hall had 
become, what a goddamn sideshow with all those people squatting 
against the walls up on the third floor, always asking where Carlos 
was, always caroming around hoping lo get a look at him, just a cou- 
ple of words with him. These weren't just anthropology majors with 
red-baked California foreheads from days in the Santa Rosa 
Mountains; they were philosophy students and mechanical engineer- 
ing students and pre-med students, a really strange kind of cerebral 
crowd — like the guy from Pittsburgh who had hitchhiked all the way 
in, seven days on the road, just to get a look at him. 

It wasn’t that the detractors in the department were jealous of Carlos 
or anything, hut more than one of them had considered their own 
scholarly lives, of hopsack and musty libraries and respectable grey 



199 / Spun bi A 


anonymity. They knew the paperwork and the bureaucracy and all the 
bullshit you had to go through, the endless political jockeying lor posi- 
tion. And they’d heard all about Carlos's teaching experience at Irvine 
and how the classroom was jammed all the time with people squatting 
everywhere, against the walls and up around the podium, the hippies 
and the young bubs and the honest students all pressing in with the 
heuristic flame in everybody’s eyes opened full tube and blazing. Given 
the alternative, who wouldn’t want that? Who among them hadn’t 
dreamt of crossing the line into that forbidden territory, where they talk 
about you at the New York cocktail parties and they silk-screen your 
words on posters that hang in rustic little Pacific Coast cottages in 
British Columbia. Who had not thought about all the sweet young bubs 
coming in their bleached jeans and their gingham halters to attend your 
class, to lock in with those perfect brown eyes, to offer you. . .everything. 
Who would refuse? 

But who would admit that? So there grew among some of the faculty 
that spring a sort of surreptitious yammering, aimed at keeping Carlos 
Castaneda from getting his Ph.D. from UCLA. And the arguments kept 
running over the same ground of methodology and credibility. 

Not everybody was denigrating Carlos. He had a number of support- 
ers among the faculty. Meighan was the most ardent one. defending as 
he did Carlos’s work before the editorial board, in private conversations 
and among the doctoral committee. As it turned out, the committee — 
Meighan, Phil Newman, all of them — fully supported Carlos, and that 
was important, because it is the committee that deals with the student, 
takes responsibility for him and speaks on his behalf before faculty 
members. If the committee backs a student completely, the rest of the 
department usually won't debate the issue, despite the reservations of 
some people. When some boy in the lounge would question the legiti- 
macy of Carlos’s findings, Meighan would leap to the defense. 

“Carlos is himself between cultures. But his informant is too." It was 
one of Meighan's strongest conclusions about Carlos and he spared 




200 / A Magical journey wilh Carlos Oslancdj 


none the spiel. “That's one of the keys to this whole situation, which is 
not very clearly brought out. It's my view looking at what I’ve heard 
about the informant that he’s part Yaqui, part Yuma and had parents in 
two different cultural traditions and lived in two different cultural tra- 
ditions on both sides of the border. He had to contend with the white 
Anglo-Saxon Protestant upper class here and the Spanish Catholic 
upper-class in Mexico, which are totally different cultural units them- 
selves. They have totally different ways of dealing with the world. Plus 
the fact that he had made contacts around the country. I think person- 
ally that Carlos and the informant hit it off because of the fact they 
could perceive each other. They were intercultural people and they were 
trying to put together how to cope, how to understand the world. 
Carlos certainly is and his informant is too. His informant did it by 
building himself a store of power, knowledge of various kinds, derived 
from various places but all within a good shamanic tradition. I think it 
was one of the reasons why their relationship hit. Two people con- 
fronted by the same kinds of intellectual problems, namely, how to put 
it all together, while surrounded by alien cultures of all kinds. And it 
just meshed.” 

That was Meighan's spiel, the idea of Carlos and Don Juan as kindred 
spirits in an alien world. There were those who weren't convinced by 
Meighan's idea and figured that Don |uan and Carlos were so much 
alike, simply because they were the same person. He had lied to his 
committee, after all, saying he had lived in Brazil and had spoken Italian 
as a child. Meighan would just sort of smile. 

“Carlos is a guy who falls between a set of cultures. Whatever his total 
mysterious background might be, there is no question that he is an 
individual who falls between a whole set of cultures. He’s not a typical 
white Anglo-Saxon Protestant. He was raised in a world where he had to 
deal with lots of different cultures operating at different levels. He said 
he had lived in Brazil when he was a little child and had spoken Italian. 
Since he could handle all the languages, it was a bureaucratic question. 




201 / Spun In A 


All the stuff in Time was new to me, My evaluation of him was based on 
whether what he was telling me about anthropology was true or not 
and there, I could believe what he was telling me.” 

The committee believed it and that spring, the members signed all 
the proper papers awarding Carlos his doctorate. With the publication 
of his dissertation as tourney lo Ixtlan, Carlos became a millionaire. 

The big news in tourney to Ixtlan was that Castaneda was not using 
psychotropic plants anymore. 1'he drugs, which had been so important 
in his first book and had assured his popularity, were completely absent 
in his third book. He had explained it all to his class at Irvine — all about 
how the plants had not been a means to an end — but a method of shak 
ing the grip of Western rationalism. But it was new to readers expecting 
deeper drug experiences in the sequel to A Separate Reality. Actually, 
only the last three chapters could accurately be called a sequel. The first 
twenty pages included material Carlos said was left out of the earlier 
books because it seemed irrelevant. Primarily, it was material that dealt 
with technique and philosophy, rather than psychotropics. 

Renewing his acquaintanceship with Don Genaro, the master acro- 
bat, Carlos felt himself moving closer to absorbing the lesson. It was still 
broad and nebulous, but essentially the lesson was one of personal 
power and independence, of knowing one's self completely, and the 
means of breaking all bonds. 





“I’m working on this book and I haven't finished it yet," Carlos phoned 
me to say. “I’m going back to Mexico in the morning. It’s called Tula of 
Power. But I don’t know, it’s going to be very difficult to write. It doesn’t 
come out. 1 have to go back again." 

I switched the phone receiver to the other ear. “Where do you go?" I 
asked. “Oaxaca?" 

“Yeah, so I won’t lie in touch with you until I come back." I men- 
tioned the divorce papers and Carlos said, “Maybe it’ll be over quickly 
and I’ll be able to balance the money and pay the lawyer. I want to get 
rid of all those people. They just ride me." 

Carlos had hired Guy Ward of the firm Ward & Heyler in Los 
Angeles to handle his legal affairs. Then he intended to lop Ward and 
Alexander Tucker off the payroll. And maybe his agent, Ned Brown 
too. Carlos lamented that the more money he made, the more depend - 
ent he seemed to become. Everything was inextricably tied to every- 
thing else and he felt as if he were struggling there in the middle, 
unable to get free. 

Back in the 1960s, it was me who had wanted the divorce, but he 
had held me off with that double shuffle in Mexico. I had complained 
often about the legal box our Mexican marriage had put me in; but 
Carlos would always assuage me by saying our relationship was per- 
fectly acceptable the way it was. It was always Carlos who wanted to 


202 



203 / Spun In I 


preserve the status quo, so it seemed strange when suddenly, in the 
autumn of 1973, he was willing to have the divorce papers drawn up. 
It was about time to break all bonds in that extended Castaneda 
metaphor he was writing. 

“1 must help that little boy,” he told me on the telephone. “There is 
something about me and my name and all that crap that stands in the 
way. He has no name. His name is Adrian Cerritsen |r. That's a very 
powerful name. I thought of helping him, but it didn’t work. It just 
didn't work.” 

The hearing that awarded me permanent custody and control of 
Carlton Jeremy was held in December 1973 at Domestic Relations 
Court of Kanawha County, West Virginia. Carlos was not present. He 
called a few days later and seemed relieved to hear it was over. Carlos 
wondered if there had been any problems. 

“Well," I said, “your birthday is the 25th. next Tuesday..." 

“No. I don't have any birthday, not anymore." 

“Yeah, well, my mother went with me to the hearing and they asked 
me a few questions. They asked me your age and I said there were quite 
a few inconsistencies. I said I didn’t really know.” Carlos leaned back 
and giggled. “So I just told them some number. I don't know!” 

It was perfect. Carlos was suddenly relieved, even buoyant at the 
news that even in the glaring legalistic light of a domestic relations 
court, even there, he had escaped with his shroud of mystery. Still an 
unknown quantity, Carlos Castaneda — Mr. Metaphysical! 

“Very good," he said, “because this way Ward can finish this thing and 
then tell me how much I owe him.” 

“Are we still friends?" 1 asked. 

“I have always fought to be your friend. We will do whatever our fate 
is. Our fate is our fate. We must accept that in humbleness. We can't 
force things and we can't ever do things that are contrary to our own 
ways of thinking and being." 




204 / A Magical journey wilh Carlos Castaneda 


It was like the old Carlos, the one back at LACC who was always talk- 
ing about fate and the virtue of living for the moment, the one who 
could be both loving and distant. I remembered how insecure he was in 
those days, how scared of failing and I knew for all his pretensions, he 
had changed very little in the last decade and a half. 

“Carlos, you were already all the things that Don luan is trying to 
bring out to make you understand," I said. “I don't understand why you 
persist in so many questions, because you’re already that. All you needed 
was somebody to confirm that; you're already the way you thought." 

Carlos paused a moment on the other end of the telephone line. 
“You’re the only person who understands that about me," he said. 

And so he was ready, finally, to wrap the whole thing up. The critics 
had all called him a liar and sometimes even he thought himself inca- 
pable of telling the truth two sentences in a row. But he’d show them; 
he’d actually end his attachments and reach that aesthetic plain before 
ever sending his manuscript to the publisher. By being honest and 
truly free, he'd close out the tetralogy redeemed. A few days after his 
conversation with me, Carlos checked with Guy Ward and got a copy of 
the divorce papers. Then he returned to his house in Westwood and 
completed Tales of Power. 

In this, the fourth book, he introduced the notion of the tonal and 
the nagual , attempted to demystify' Don |uan and finally wrote about 
himself and fellow initiate Pablito at the edge of the plain, in that rite of 
passage he had dreamed of for years. There were no specific dates, no 
anthropological touchstones, nothing but a broad unfolding drama in 
pure novelistic form. He allowed the reader to slip without warning 
from “real world” to this curious state he called the Separate Reality, tes 
timony to both the excellence of Don Juan’s deft manipulation and 
Carlos’s subjective style. 

Anthropologists had used the terms tonal and nagual for years. 
Doug Sharon ran across them while doing research among the 
Peruvian curanderos, but Carlos expanded on the definitions. 




205 / Spun In I 


Essentially, the tonal is everything for which we have words, while the 
naguetl is everything we can't define, identify or name. Only Carlos 
went beyond that. Through conversations with Don |uan, he supplied 
the nuance, the substance — so much that Doug Sharon even used an 
advance copy in writing his own Ph.D. thesis at UCLA. 

After meeting Don luan at a restaurant in Mexico City, Carlos was 
prepared for the sorcerer's explanation and the initiation. It was a 
strange meeting, with the old man dressed in a brown pinstripe suit, 
white shirt and tie and dismissing much of the technique and jargon of 
the past twelve years. The real goods lay in stopping the internal dia- 
logue that reconstitutes the real world. 

So finally Carlos Castaneda sat there at his desk in Westwood, 
pounding away at the typewriter with a painful intensity and the sweat 
rolling down his jawline and the adrenaline thrumming up through the 
external carotid. In the end, he wrote about C.J. not as “my little boy" 
anymore, as in the earlier books, but as “a little boy I once knew.” He was 
keeping nothing secret here; he had made the break. Back in the fall of 
1 976, Carlos had written to me about how he and C.J. had gone hiking 
in the mountains north of Los Angeles. 

"There is not one single day that goes by in which I don't think of 
you and my chocho," he had written. “And 1 don't say this just to say 
something, although it may sound like an empty ready-made state- 
ment, like those everybody makes to fit the occasion. There is not one- 
single day of peace for me without you two. I would like to hike again 
with my chocho. Once, I was carrying him on my shoulders up the side 
of a hill and when we got to the top, he shouted to the sun and to the 
mountains, “Sun, mountains, I love Kiki.” 

“His little voice will resound in my ears to the end of my life. How I 
wish I could see you two again! But my fate was to lose both of you, and 
there is nothing one can do against one’s fate, except to hope.” 

So he wrote about that too — and to hell with those critics who 
always said he wrote fiction. In the end, he went beyond the lanky guy 




206 / A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


rising out of the shadows and beyond the portentous sorcerer’s expla 
nation, which remained nebulous even after four books. Towards the 
end of his journey, he wrote about himself, standing there in the desert 
watching Don Genaro suddenly flash like a strobe and then push off 
into a floating weightless dive. 

When Don luan whispered into one ear and Don Genaro began 
whispering into the other, Carlos felt his consciousness split in two. It 
was here that the anthropologists had always stopped, right here, with 
their tawdry ideas about schizophrenia. It was all the same. Carlos 
looked up and watched Pablito leap off the cliff and explode in a spray 
of points, a billion fragments of primitive awareness. Then he got up 
and walked to the edge and jumped loo, right into the mouth of it, 
becoming in one electric instant a cluster of light and mental energy, 
with the recognition that he was free... and alone. 

"The last time I talked to him, he was absolutely normal and 
rational,” Clement Meighan was saying that summer in 1974, as the 
advance copies of Tales of Power were making the rounds at UCLA. "I 
had no feelings about his losing reality at all. He has a good sense of 
humor, and he can appreciate what’s going on. He can take a certain 
detached attitude about it, which I think is a saving grace. If he really 
were totally humorless in his approach to this whole business. I think 
he’d been in an institution right now. He has enough detachment and 
humor so that he can come out of it. 

“On the other hand, the kinds of things he’s working with require 
you to engage your intellect. You have to have the brain cells turned on 
and firing in order to weave through the labyrinth to make sense of it. 
Or at least, in his case, to make sense out of it to the extent of putting it 
down on paper. He often complains to me that he's having a terrible dif- 
ficulty trying to get the ideas out and down and written. He’s working 
on it. It comes and goes. There are times that he’s obviously hassling it 
through and his mind is totally committed and then, when he’s over 




207 / Spiiii by Allegory 


that hump, he’s solved that problem and is relaxed and in a good frame 
of mind, he seems perfectly normal." 




Carlos Castaneda arrived late, slipping in unobtrusively during the 
speeches. But C.J. spotted him right away. The boy sat out there in the 
middle of the football field with the other students and he watched 
Carlos up in the stands, weaving his way though the aisles, until he 
found my sister Betty Virzi and her husband, Victor. 

Carlos was late, but still in time. When the principal on stage began 
reading the names of all the May 1975 graduates of Connoly Junior 
High School here in Tempe, Arizona, Carlos was there to see it. And 
when the principal announced. "Carlton leremy Castaneda," and C.|. 
walked across the stage in his white jacket and powder blue slacks to get 
his diploma, Carlos grinned broadly and nodded. 

Later, at my townhousc in Tempe, Carlos was ebullient. 

He was always like this in a small group of friends, a gracious master 
of small talk, light years from his quasi-public image of mysterious aca 
demit and reluctant guru. Carlos was a bit stockier than the last time I 
had seen him, but he still had that bouncy athletic presence. He was 
dressed in a conservative grey suit with a white shirt that made his 
brown face seem somehow darker. The black curls were clipped a bit. 
but still there. It was the look of a distinguished professor. Only when 
Betty tried to snap his picture did he reveal a bit of the Castaneda per- 
sonality by jerking out of the way. Betty’s picture-taking bothered him. 
but he didn’t say anything about it. 



209 I Spun In I 


Carlos decided it was time to leave and so he rounded up every- 
body — Betty and Victor, C.J. and me, old friend Kay Quinn and her two 
daughters Kathy and Patricia, and my nephew Michael Magana and 
he suggested they all go to Gregory's Penthouse in Phoenix for dinner. 
On tlie way, sitting in my car, Carlos talked to C.(. about returning to 
Los Angeles with him for the summer. He hinted that they would go to 
Europe, but C. J. seemed reluctant. Carlos urged, but C.J. refused, largely 
because Carlos was so unreliable. Carlos had promised before to take 
C.J. to Europe, but hadn't; he had promised to call and visit and send 
letters, but rarely did. C.J. had bitter memories of waiting for telephone 
calls that never came, for letters that never arrived. Once, in a fit of 
pique, C.J. declared to me that he would never hurt a human being the 
way Carlos had hurt him. In time, he intended to go away into the 
wilderness and live like a hermit. Carlos seemed to get the message. 
Before going inside, Carlos said he would call C.J. at the end of the sum- 
mer to see if anything had changed, but he didn’t really mean it 

The rest of the night, Carlos was attentive and effusive. He domi- 
nated the conversation. He asked Kay about living in Utah and asked 
one of her daughters about a recent trip she’d taken to England. He 
talked with Betty about the old days in Los Angeles and he gave C.J. a 
SI 00 bill as a graduation present. It was all food and small talk. Only 
once did he touch on his apprenticeship and only then, when I asked 
about Don Juan. 

“He disappeared,” said Carlos. “He’s not there anymore." 

“Did he die?" I asked. 

Carlos looked at me. “He just disappeared." It was clear he didn't 
want to talk about it. 

After everybody had eaten and had sat around talking over dessert 
and coffee, Carlos left the table and went over to the cashier to pay the 
bill. He handed the cashier his Master Charge card and she started to 
ring the whole thing up when suddenly she froze and her eyes opened 
in recognition. 




210 / A Magical journey with Carlos Castaneda 


Was he r he Carlos Castaneda? The writer? The one who had written 
all those mystical Indian books? Carlos nodded. 

Had she known! She apologized profusely for the table, which was 
way back by the kitchen, where you could hear the clashing of the sil- 
verware. She lamented that the restaurant had been so busy and that 
someone of his stature had been shuttled to the back like some com- 
mon burgher. Had she only known! 

Carlos assured her that everything was fine and just wanted to pay 
the bill. We were hardly to the elevator, when suddenly a half-dozen 
sun-blonde waitresses were around him, sweet young things all gath- 
ered around, pressing in — giggling and staring in a kind of mystical 
awe. Here was the man who had written so eloquently about reaching 
that rarefied peak, about taking the final step into the folk world of the 
brujo. Here he was at arm's length, a flat-out subterranean legend, just 
standing by the elevator at Gregory's Penthouse in a natty charcoal grey 
Botany Club suit. And he was so gracious about it, so self-effacing as 
they scrambled around for notebooks and napkins and scraps of 
paper — anything big enough for an autograph. He didn't seem to l>e 
rattled by it. He just stood there with his eyes darting around, scribbling 
his name. 

Then something happened. He stopped suddenly and his face 
froze and he kept staring down at the paper in his hand, as if at some- 
thing incredible, and there it wa s. ..Carlos Castaneda! Descendent of 
the legendary Shaman! Creature of the Myth! He reeled under the 
weight of it all — while all around him these giggly young girls waited 
for their autographs... 





When will this dream ever go away? It's always the same; he's always 
walking on the desert seared out of his gourd and is wondering when it 
will happen — when he will spot the mysterious polymorphic ally. And 
suddenly, out there at the corner of his eve, a lanky old guy rises out of 
the shadows, the same long face and spectral cheekbones, the same 
ominous presence that has always haunted his dreams, only now the 
ally is bald and has a scaly eczema or something all over the left side of 
his head. The guy stares straight out of his hollow eyesockets and Carlos 
stares back. The surrealistic scene hovers in the red Mexican dawn. 

It's taken him years to reach this point and Carlos can feel the con- 
stant thrum of adrenalin along the external carotid, which always comes 
when he thinks maybe, just maybe, he will consummate the battle on 
the plain and become a sorcerer and have the stuff to finish the last 
book of the Don luan saga. 

But he always wakes up before the conclusion... 


211 



Epilogue 

I finally resigned myself to the fact that I would never be able to see 
Carlos or talk with him again. He never responded to my calls or notes 
that I had written over the years to his business office. 

I was surprised when David Christie called around the 1“ of October 
in 1993 to inform me that Carlos was going to lecture at the Phoenix 
Bookstore in Santa Monica, California. 

His latest book, The An of Dreaming, had been only out a month or 
two. I was so excited 1 could hardly contain myself. I said, “I would love 
to attend — what should I do?" Then David said, “It's only by invitation." 
David said he would check with the bookstore owner and see if he could 
bring a guest. He called me back and said I could attend the lecture with 
him. Immediately I called Adrian (C.J.). He was excited too and, of 
course, wanted to go with me. I said there might be a problem for him 
to get in and he said, “Don’t worry Mom, I’ll get in.” 

Arriving early gave me time to gel my composure to speak with 
Carlos, if the occasion arose. However, the occasion didn’t arise. 

Finally we were allowed to go inside the bookstore before Carlos 
made an appearance. Adrian (C.J.) spoke with a lady waiting outside 
who seemed to be alone and asked if he could be her guest. She gra- 
ciously said. “Yes," Carlos finally entered, dressed in a silk shirt opened at 
the neck, jeans, a brown leather vest and heavy-looking cowboy boots. 

I became very upset when I saw that his hair was completely grey. I 
had also expected to see him wearing a suit, shirt, and tic. The years that 
separated us for so long were completely dissolved — as though time 
had collapsed. 


213 



2U ! A Magical tourney with Carlos Castaneda 


He looked slim and in very good shape. I closed my eyes for a 
moment and listened to him speak with his delightful accent. Then I 
opened my eyes to observe his stage presence. Carlos is still wonderfully 
charming and has the ability to hold his audience spellbound. 1 le spoke 
for about three hours, allowing questions to be asked during the lecture. 
He responded with lengthy answers to questions put to him. 

He left the stage and exiled the rear door at the back of the book- 
store. I hurriedly exited to make an attempt to talk with him, if only for 
a moment. He was already in his van starting to drive away when Adrian 
(Cl.) knocked on the window. Carlos stopped and said, “Oh, there’s my 
Chocho!” and got out. He went over to see C.J., hugged him and began 
talking. C.J. said that Carlos told him that he was a powerful warrior 
and repeated over and over again that he would be back with him soon. 

While he spoke to GJ., I walked over to one of the tall young women 
who seemed to guard him and said. “I would like to speak with Carlos 
when he’s finished talking with C.J." Her answer was, “No." I said, “Do 
you know who I am?” She replied, “Yes." I just stood there and contin- 
ued to wait. 

Carlos walked over to me. He put his arms around me, kissed my 
cheek and expressed his seeming delight to see me. Then he stood back 
and just looked at me. When he did that, 1 asked if lie would sign the 
book I had in my hand, his latest book, The Art of Dreaming. His answer, 
which 1 never expected, was, “Oh, I’m sorry, my hands are too tired.*’ And 
then he held his hands out in a gesture indicating they were really tired. I 
said to Carlos, “Oh, don’t worry, it's all right, I've ordered the leather- 
bound edition from Easton Press, and I know you signed those." As he 
walked to the van he threw kisses to me and then drove away. 

Carlos left me with the same impression he gives everyone else — he 
is still as mysterious and magical as he's always been. 




215 I IniroJiutioii 


Yon rising Moon that looks for us again — 

How oft hereafter will she wax and wane; 

How oft hereafter rising look for us 
Through this same Garden — and for one in vain 

— The Rubdiydt of Omar Khayyam 




About the Author 

Margaret Runyan Castaneda was born in Charleston, West Virginia, 
Kanawha County, on November 14, 1921. She is the eldest of six chil- 
dren. Her father, Dennie Runyan, owned a dairy in Charleston. 

She graduated from South Charleston High School in 1940 and 
attended the Charleston School of Commerce, majoring in Business. 
She worked for C and I’ Telephone Company (Chesapeake Jfc Potomac 
Telephone Co.) as an operator and on the assignment desk, assigning 
telephones to customers, from November 1940 to July 1943. She then 
went to work for Union Carbide as a chemical analyst. 

She worked for Union Carbide until 1947; then she went to 
California. “I started working for Pacific Telephone Company in 1947 
and held the position of Assistant Chief Operator until 1963,” she says. 
“1 attended Los Angeles City College, while working full-time, accumu- 
lating two years' worth of credits; my major was psychology and my 
minor was Russian.” 

She did further study at UCLA in Audio-Visual Education. 

She married Carlos Castaneda in January 1960; they separated in July 
I960 and were divorced on December 17, 1973. She moved to West 
Virginia in 1966. In 1967, she went to Washington, D.C., working for 
the CBS Affiliate W "LOP-TV and Radio as Chief Operator. In 1971, she 
moved to the Phoenix area of Arizona. 

She currently resides in Charleston, West Virginia. 


217